Quarterlytics / Financial Services / Asset Management - Bonds / Record

Record

rec · LSE Financial Services
Claim this profile
Ticker rec
Exchange LSE
Sector Financial Services
Industry Asset Management - Bonds
Employees 51-200
← All annual reports
FY2020 Annual Report · Record
Sign in to download
Loading PDF…
R

e

c

o

r

d

p

l

c

A

n

n

u

a

l

R

e

p

o

r

t

2

0

2

0

Intelligent
currency 
management

Record plc 
Annual Report 2020

 
 
 
 
 
Our purpose to deliver innovative, thought 
leading and practical solutions to the needs 
of currency market users and investors, while 
maintaining independence and integrity.

Financial statements
pages 90 to 130

Independent auditor’s report 

Financial statements 

Notes to the financial statements 

Additional information
pages 131 to 132

Five year summary 

Information for shareholders 

Definitions 

91

96

103

131

131

132

Contents

Strategic report
pages 1 to 49

Highlights 

About us 

Chairman’s statement 

Chief Executive Officer’s statement 

Business model 

Markets 

Strategic priorities and goals  

Key performance indicators 

Operating review 

Financial review 

Risk management 

Corporate social responsibility 

Governance 
pages 50 to 89

Corporate governance 

Chairman’s introduction 

Board of Directors 

Corporate governance report 

Nomination Committee report 

Audit and Risk Committee report 

Remuneration report 

Directors’ report  

Directors’ responsibilities statement  

1

2

4

6

10

18

22

26

30

34

38

46

50

51

52

54

62

64

70

86

89

Highlights

Assets Under Management 
Equivalents1 (“AUME”)

$58.6bn
2019: $57.3bn
+2.3%

Earnings per share 

3.26p
2019: 3.27p
-0.3%

Revenue 

Ordinary dividend per share 

£25.6m
2019: £25.0m
+2.4%

2.30p
2019: 2.30p
0.0%

Profit before tax 

Special dividend per share 

£7.7m
2019: £8.0m
-3.2%

0.41p
2019: 0.69p
-40.6%

1.  As a currency manager Record manages only the impact of foreign exchange and not the underlying assets, therefore its “assets under management” are notional 
rather than real. To distinguish this from the AUM of conventional asset managers, Record uses the concept of Assets Under Management Equivalents (“AUME”) 
and by convention this is quoted in US dollars. AUME is an alternative performance measure and further detail on how it is defined is provided on page 132. 

Record plc Annual Report 2020

1

Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional informationAbout us

A client-focused approach.
A culture of integrity.
Strengths developed through 37 years of experience.

Who we are

What we do

We are an independent, specialist 
currency manager and have been since our 
formation in 1983. We have over 37 years 
of experience in currency markets which 
has allowed us to develop a deep and 
fundamental understanding of the risk and 
reward opportunities within those markets. 
Record plc has a premium listing on the 
Main Market of the London Stock 
Exchange, and is majority‑owned 
by its Directors and employees.

We listen to our clients and use our years 
of experience and thought leadership in 
currency markets to develop solutions 
tailored to their individual currency‑related 
needs, including robust and innovative 
products and market‑leading service levels.

Our range of products typically assist 
our clients in achieving either their 
risk‑reduction or return‑seeking objectives, 
or alternatively our bespoke Multi‑product 
mandates have combined risk‑reducing 
and return‑seeking objectives.

Our clients are largely institutions, including 
pension funds, charities, foundations, 
endowments, and family offices, as well as 
other fund managers and corporate clients.

Research

Experience and 
know how

Innovation

Bespoke

Where we operate

Head office 
Windsor

Sales office
New York

Sales office 
Switzerland

North America

Europe

Rest of the World

2

Record plc Annual Report 2020

About us

About  
us

Business 
model

Strategic 
priorities  
and goals

Key 
performance 
indicators

Markets

Operating 
review

Finance  
and risk

Corporate 
social 
responsibility

Where we operate

How we create value

Quality client 
experience

Technology and 
innovation

Talent  
development 

Superior service is core to our client 
proposition and we achieve this on 
various levels by assigning a 
dedicated and experienced 
relationship manager to oversee each 
client portfolio. Direct communication 
between our operational and 
administrative specialists with each 
client’s own internal functions builds 
on the general level of interaction with 
the client and underpins the overall 
“trusted adviser” relationship.

Over the last 37 years Record has 
developed a leading position in its 
sector. Our knowledge of the 
currency market is sustained by our 
research, and results in innovative 
products and continued process 
enhancement whilst incorporating 
advances in technology.

We aim to develop and retain a 
diverse pool of talent which is key 
to delivering our “best in class” 
business model and ensuring the 
long‑term stability of the business.

The Group’s main geographical markets as determined 
by the location of clients to whom services are provided, 
are the UK, North America and Continental Europe, 
in particular Switzerland. The Group also has clients 
elsewhere, including Australia.

The Group’s Head Office is in Windsor, UK from where the 
majority of its operations are performed and controlled. 
The Group also has offices in New York and in Zürich. 

In addition to these main markets, we continue to explore 
new geographical markets which we believe may offer 
attractive opportunities.

72% 

14% 

11% 

AUME

$42.3bn

Europe (excluding UK)

AUME

$8.1bn

North America

AUME

$6.7bn

United Kingdom

3%

AUME

$1.5bn

Rest of the world

Record plc Annual Report 2020

3

Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional information 
Chairman’s statement

Writing this statement in the middle 
of the Coronavirus lockdown is a 
timely reminder both of the value of 
our asset-based revenue model, and 
of the importance of adaptability.

Neil Record
Chairman

2020 will be remembered as the Coronavirus year. It is also 
the year in which Record plc made some important decisions 
for its future.

In February 2020, we announced that James Wood‑Collins was 
stepping down as CEO, and that he would be replaced by our 
Client Team Director, Leslie Hill.

Group strategy
I indicated above that the Board is prioritising growth and 
succession in its strategy. This will mean building on our existing 
strong base of current business, including a review of the products 
and services that Record offers to its clients, and an assessment of 
the way in which we deliver those products and services.

Before I describe the thinking behind this change, I want to pay 
tribute to the efforts that James devoted to Record in his nine 
years in this role. Under James’s leadership, we re‑established 
our equilibrium following the Global Financial Crisis, and diversified 
our range of currency market products and services.

Early in the year, the Board took the view that two imperatives 
were emerging at Record: that it was becoming increasingly vital to 
orientate the firm for growth, and it was also becoming increasingly 
vital to establish succession in the most senior executive posts 
at Record.

The Board took the view that Leslie Hill, 64, our veteran Client 
Team Director, with 27 years already completed at Record, had the 
skills and vision to deliver both growth and succession. 
This change was facilitated by the arrival of a new Client Team 
Director, Sally Francis‑Cole, who comes with 20 years’ experience 
in FX sales.

Leslie sets out her plans in more detail in her statement.

Financial overview
Strong net inflows of $4.6 billion for the year (2019: outflows 
of $4.5 billion) helped drive the 2.3% increase in our final AUME 
of $58.6 billion, despite the negative impact on markets from 
covid‑19 and the consequent decrease of $4.5 billion in our AUME 
in the final quarter.

Revenues increased by 2.4% to £25.6 million (2019: £25.0 million), 
operating profit fell slightly to £7.6 million (2019: £7.9 million) and 
earnings per share remained broadly flat at 3.26 pence (2019: 
3.27 pence).

Further information on AUME flows and financial results can be 
found in the Operating review and Financial review sections on 
pages 30 and 34 respectively.

Record is no longer a young company. At 37 years old, we 
have built up a modus operandi which is reliable and effective. 
However, technological changes, FX market changes and the 
changing nature of our client base means that the time has 
come to re‑think how we deliver our services in an increasingly 
technologically dominated market.

Under Leslie’s new leadership, we will embrace change to deliver 
our goals.

Further detail on our strategy and goals and our progress made 
against initiatives can be found under “Strategic priorities and 
goals” on pages 22 to 25.

Capital and dividend
Our capital policy aims to ensure retained capital broadly equivalent 
to one year’s worth of future estimated overheads (excluding 
variable remuneration), in addition to capital assessed as required 
for regulatory purposes, for working capital purposes and for 
investing in new opportunities for the business.

Our dividend policy targets a level of dividend which is at least 
covered by earnings and which allows for sustainable dividend 
growth in line with the trend in profitability. It is also the Board’s 
intention, subject to financial performance and market conditions 
at the time, to return excess earnings over ordinary dividends for 
the financial year and adjusted for changes in capital requirements, 
to shareholders, normally in the form of special dividends.

The Board is recommending a final ordinary dividend of 1.15 pence 
per share (2019: 1.15 pence), with the full‑year ordinary dividend at 
2.30 pence, which is equivalent to the full‑year ordinary dividend in 
respect of the prior year (2019: 2.30 pence). The interim dividend 
of 1.15 pence per share was paid on 27 December 2019, and the 
final ordinary dividend of 1.15 pence per share will be paid on 
11 August 2020 to shareholders on the register at 3 July 2020, 
subject to shareholders’ approval.

4

Record plc Annual Report 2020

Chairman’s statement

The Board has considered at length the current market conditions, 
including uncertainties surrounding global trade, Brexit and the 
high likelihood of a global recession arising from the Coronavirus.  
Such a high level of uncertainty brings with it the need for a 
measured and prudent approach to ensuring the business retains 
sufficient capital and liquidity to withstand any negative impacts 
arising, whilst also allowing the business to continue to invest in 
implementing its new strategy.

Against this backdrop, the Group has assessed its capital 
requirement both in terms of the current market conditions and 
also its anticipated costs and regulatory capital required for the 
current financial year, which has resulted in an increase to capital 
required in line with its policy. The net increase in capital required is 
equivalent to 0.55 pence per share and consequently the Board is 
announcing a special dividend of 0.41 pence per share to be paid 
simultaneously with the final ordinary dividend. Total dividends for 
the year are 2.71 pence per share (2019: 2.99 pence) compared 
to earnings per share of 3.26 pence per share (2019: 3.27 pence).

The Board will continue to consider ordinary dividends and other 
distributions to shareholders on a “total distribution” basis. The 
total distribution for any year will be at least covered by earnings, 
and will always be subject to the financial performance of the 
business, the market conditions at the time and to any further 
capital assessed as required under the policy described above.

Outlook
Many chairmen’s statements written in the first half of 2020 will 
look ahead with a much larger degree of uncertainty than is usually 
the case – and this one is no different. At the time of writing, the 
UK is beginning to gradually ease restrictions, our offices remain 
closed, and all our activity is taking place by remote working 
using technology.

I cannot predict the path of the global economy, of the global 
regulatory environment or of global political developments with 
any clarity. However, it is at least clear to me that the services we 
offer – the management of risks and opportunities associated with 
foreign currency markets – will continue to find demand from 
clients. If our new strategy is successful, then we should see that 
demand rising, whatever the global backdrop.

On behalf of the Board, I would like to thank everyone at Record 
for their hard work and extraordinary adaptability in the face of the 
unprecedented demands of the Coronavirus lockdown. Many of 
my colleagues were working very long days in surroundings 
unfamiliar to business activities, and their commitment and 
flexibility has meant that our clients have continued to receive 
the services that they pay us for.

The Board
The only change to the composition of the Board was the 
departure of James Wood‑Collins in February 2020. The Board has 
acted decisively in making the personnel changes I have outlined, 
but more importantly, has helped executives focus on the 
importance of change and renewal in every aspect of the firm.

Neil Record
Chairman

18 June 2020

Record plc Annual Report 2020

5

Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional informationChief Executive Officer’s statement

Our strategy is focused on 
accelerating growth, planning 
for generational change and in 
delivering added-value for all of 
our stakeholders.

Leslie Hill
Chief Executive Officer

Using this foundation, my role is now to develop the business 
by injecting new energy and vigour to deliver on the growth 
opportunities that we currently anticipate through diversification 
and modernisation. By taking the right steps to leverage our 
position as a trusted and professional provider of Currency Risk 
Management and Risk for Return products, in combination with 
the introduction of new talent and leadership, for example in the 
shape of our new Head of Global Sales, Sally Francis‑Cole and 
others, I believe we have the resources to sharpen our client focus 
and put the business on an accelerated growth trajectory over the 
medium term. Looking forwards we will look to further expand and 
strengthen our sales team to be able to capitalise on the new 
product offerings we are developing.

Our plan is also to deepen and broaden our interaction with 
existing and potential clients, both in our traditional product range 
and in the new diversifying products and services we are evolving. 
This will enable us to strengthen our business, and use our 
financial stability and liquid asset rich balance sheet to launch new 
initiatives and innovate – always keeping a very firm eye on what 
our clients tell us they want and will pay us to provide.

This requires a change of emphasis both in how we utilise 
our current resources most effectively, and also where we need 
to focus additional effort and resources going forward in order 
to achieve our goals. Our strategy will seek to consolidate our 
presence in our key international markets, as well as extend 
our reach across and into different geographical markets, 
using diversified and innovative products and services, 
and using and expanding our existing relationships both 
with investment consultants and clients.

Our success will depend upon reinforcing, and further building 
on the cornerstones to our strategy, which are:

•  Quality client experience

•  Technology and innovation

•  Talent development

I am delighted to welcome you to this year’s Annual Report, 
my inaugural report after my appointment as Record’s CEO in 
February 2020, and just prior to the end of the financial year. 
For those of you who are new to Record, I joined the business in 
1992, and was appointed as a Director and Head of Client Team in 
1999, having previously gained experience as a Director and Head 
of Corporate Foreign Exchange sales worldwide for Merrill Lynch.

I am fortunate in being able to take over from James Wood‑Collins, 
who has shown full commitment over the last nine years in building 
Record into the strong and more diversified business that it is 
today, and for which I and the rest of the Board are grateful.

Looking ahead, I see some exciting opportunities for the Group to 
accelerate growth and to realise its full potential, and I fully intend 
to capitalise on as many of these opportunities as possible.

Company strategy
Record is a listed specialist currency management business which 
has built a unique position with over 37 years in the FX market. 
Over this period, we have built a robust and diversified business 
with an excellent team of committed and talented professionals.

Our strategy has always been to deliver high quality products and 
services to our clients, using our thought leadership married with 
our capabilities in research and innovation. This approach has 
served us well over 37 years and has enabled us to build 
long‑standing and trusted relationships with our clients, 
and a strong and sustainable business.

6

Record plc Annual Report 2020

Chief Executive Officer’s statement

Assets Under Management 
Equivalents (“AUME”) 

$58.6bn
2019: $57.3bn
+2.3%

Quality client experience
A feature of many of our service offerings in recent years has been 
fee compression. We have countered this by working hard to add 
value in many ways to client hedging portfolios, for example Cash 
Collateralisation services, enhancements to Passive Hedging to 
reduce hedging cost, and hedging of difficult and complex portfolios, 
like Illiquid Assets and Emerging Market Equities and Bonds. During 
the recent covid‑19 crisis we found that clients really appreciated our 
stability, reliability and our deep infrastructure. By helping them with 
complex derivatives as well as the more standard hedging we have 
been able to show that although clients may underestimate the value 
of a full service offering when times are good, it comes into its own 
at difficult times.

We do not necessarily expect this phenomenon to persist forever, 
but I know our staff really enjoy being able to “show what they can 
do” – like all good craftsmen and artists! This is a deep and abiding 
source of satisfaction in all our offices, and makes us a true 
specialist, who can nevertheless rise to a fresh challenge.

Our long‑standing client relationships allow us to know each other 
well. As a result clients allow us, from time to time, to try things that 
are new to them, and sometimes to us, allowing us to diversify. 
This mutual trust is a source of our strength and also our future 
growth. Seeding new products and ideas is always a challenge 
and so we look for trusted and trusting seed capital to get ideas 
off the ground, and I believe this will be a great launch pad for our 
future growth, to strengthen our business and expand the base 
from which we operate.

Technology and innovation
Technology is changing both the way we do business and the 
markets in which we do business. Observing and investing in 
new technology is essential for ensuring our business remains 
competitive in terms of our client servicing, our product innovation 
and productivity, and for maintaining profitability. We will adopt 
relevant and innovative technology where we can be satisfied it 
offers cost‑effective opportunities to maximise the possibilities for 
new products and services as well as enhancing our current 
capabilities and efficiencies.

In terms of product innovation, our new products and services 
initiatives have included the hiring of an experienced Macro and 
Currency Manager, John Floyd. His Dynamic Macro Currency 
strategy has now been funded within the Record – Currency 
Multi‑Strategy Fund. We intend to build a suite of Return‑Seeking 
products of which we can be proud.

In addition we have been asked by clients to develop our EM 
currency offering using so‑called Frontier Currencies, and this is 
another step in the evolution of our EM currency product, and was 
seeded this year.

We have developed an ESG/impact bond offering that has also 
been attracting some attention, and while it is still early stages and 
we have yet to see real fruits from this innovation, we have good 
reason to think that this is a robust trend which will last a long 
time – long enough for us to be able to add this product range 
to our offering.

The effects of the covid‑19 lockdown are also allowing us to 
consider how we can harness technology to evolve the way we 
work, the locations we operate from and the way we interact with 
each other and with our clients: we are being asked to engage in 
virtual due diligence meetings for example and we are planning our 
first virtual Final for a mandate in Europe. We hope this will be a 
feature of our business going forward, allowing us to be cost 
efficient and have greater global reach.

Record plc Annual Report 2020

7

Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional informationChief Executive Officer’s statement continued

Talent development 
This year we have started to work ever harder to develop our 
young talented professionals, by rewarding them with training, 
support, added responsibility and remuneration to take them to 
the higher ranks within our organisation. We offer a collegiate 
working environment but work within clear and firmly held beliefs 
and structures. Everyone knows what they are supposed to do, 
and are given help to achieve their goals and be the best that they 
can be.

New hires in our Zürich, New York and London offices are an 
important part of our talent recruitment and development. 
In addition, existing staff have a chance to elect to work overseas, 
and access our network for high quality training and work 
experience, on occasion, outside our own office environment.

It is essential we build a really strong plan for generational change, 
and we will not hold back here. It is often hard to achieve, but we 
believe that by taking the lead from our Chairman, who has been 
courageous over the years in allowing new talent to flourish, we 
can achieve the same again.

More detailed information on Talent development is provided in 
the Strategic report on pages 22 to 25.

Market overview
Following a relatively calm first half, the impact of covid‑19 on 
currency markets was reflected in heightened volatility, reduced 
liquidity and sharp increases in bid/offer spreads in the final quarter 
of our financial year. In such times, our established long‑term 
trading relationships come to the fore, allowing us to cement our 
relationships with clients by ensuring we respond to their requests 
and continue to deliver the highest levels of client service and best 
execution available. As we enter a period of heightened economic 
uncertainty and probable recession following covid‑19, the 
importance of having a trusted partner with the expertise and 
experience to help clients navigate through such uncertain markets 
cannot be underestimated, and this provides us with an excellent 
opportunity for growth.

More detailed information on foreign exchange markets over the 
period is provided in the Markets section on pages 18 to 21.

Investment performance
As mentioned above, during the year we introduced a new 
return‑seeking currency strategy to our portfolio: the Dynamic 
Macro Currency strategy managed by John Floyd, which is 
complementary to Record’s more systematic return‑seeking 
currency strategies and which offers some welcome diversification 
to our return‑seeking product suite.

The Dynamic Macro strategy tends to perform well in more volatile 
markets as evidenced by the overall positive performance for the 
year. Conversely, and notwithstanding three quarters of positive 
performance to the end of the calendar year, the Multi‑Strategy 
product delivered overall negative performance for the year linked 
to the impact of covid‑19 on markets in the final quarter.

Further detail on our product range is provided on pages 14 to 17, 
and product performance data is provided on pages 30 and 31.

Asset flows and financial performance
AUME closed the year at $58.6 billion, increasing by 2.3% in 
US dollar terms, and increasing by 7.5% to £47.3 billion in 
sterling terms. Net inflows for the first six months of $2.0 billion 
were further bolstered by an additional $2.6 billion in the second 
half, in aggregate representing 8% of the opening AUME position. 
This was driven predominantly by inflows of $4.1 billion into 
Passive Hedging, although both Dynamic Hedging and Currency 
for Return saw inflows of $0.2 billion and $0.3 billion during the 
year respectively.

Detailed analysis of AUME is provided on pages 31 to 33.

The management fees of £25.6 million increased 2.4% (2019: 
£25.0 million). We have invested in our people and technology and 
will continue to do so cost effectively as we aim for growth, which 
we believe will strengthen the business over the longer term. 
Consequently, the Group’s operating margin reduced marginally 
from 32% to 30%, and profit before tax decreased by 3.2% to 
£7.7 million (2019: £8.0 million). Basic earnings per share was 
broadly flat at 3.26 pence (2019: 3.27 pence).

The Financial review on pages 34 to 37 gives additional 
commentary.

8

Record plc Annual Report 2020

Chief Executive Officer’s statement continued

Outlook
Rigour and discipline is always hard to marry with creativity and 
flexibility and it is this art that we seek to achieve, staying relevant, 
and surprising our clients and prospects with the range and quality 
of our thinking, and with the ability to deliver what we promise.

Our flexibility and capability to react to volatile and occasionally 
extreme market conditions has been proved over the last few 
months, both in terms of continuing to service our clients to the 
high levels they expect and deserve, but also in maintaining the 
business continuity under the most severe circumstances, whilst 
always ensuring the wellbeing and motivation of our staff. In the 
current market conditions we need to be careful not to 
overpromise but always to try and over achieve.

We are a strong and resilient business, with a long‑standing client 
base and a cash generative business model. Our team is talented 
and experienced, we are committed to our business, to each other 
and of course, always, to our clients. This I believe will allow us to 
take our business to the next level and we will give it everything we 
have to achieve that goal.

Leslie Hill
Chief Executive Officer

18 June 2020

Record plc Annual Report 2020

9

Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional informationBusiness model

Our business model depends on our 
relationships and our people.

Relationships and resources

What we do 

Our clients
We are client‑led – client relationships are the keystone 
of our success. Only by building strong, long‑term 
“trusted adviser” relationships with our clients can we fully 
understand their currency issues and develop effective 
solutions for their currency requirements.

Our experience
We are a specialist currency manager with over 37 years’ 
experience – we have a fundamental understanding of how 
currency markets operate, which we have used to develop a 
leading position in managing currency for institutional clients.

Our people
We view our ability to attract, retain and motivate 
highly talented staff as key to organisational stability 
and long‑term success. 

Our recruitment process is carefully structured to ensure 
that talented people with the right skills and experience 
are recruited into the Group. See “Talent development” 
on page 25 for further information. 

Technology and infrastructure
Investing in new technology is essential for ensuring our 
business remains competitive in terms of our client servicing, 
our product innovation and productivity, and for maintaining 
profitability. 

Our operational infrastructure is built around how we service 
our clients and ensures a collaborative approach across all 
sections of the business. Refer to “Technology and 
innovation” on page 24 for further information.

Our financial resources
The business maintains a robust balance sheet and strong 
capital position. Positive cash generation allows us to 
reinvest for growth in the business and to drive shareholder 
value and returns.

Our core stakeholder groups:
•  Clients

•  Society

•  Shareholders

•  External suppliers

•  People

•  Regulators

Our investment process
We seek to identify and understand persistent patterns 
that exist within currency markets that are rooted in 
macroeconomic cycles, global risk management activity, 
as well as structural and behavioural features of investment 
activity. By understanding these patterns, whether they be 
market inefficiencies or risk premia, we can develop both risk 
mitigation and value‑adding strategies.

We develop robust systematic processes, with macro and 
market‑informed portfolio positioning and intelligent risk 
management oversight, which offer the best chance to 
achieve client objectives once implemented within our 
rigorous operational environment.

We continually test the underlying assumptions that support 
our investment beliefs and practices. This constant cycle of 
challenging and reviewing our investment philosophies drives 
product enhancement and new product development 
alongside the requirements of our clients.

Our independence and transparency
We act as an independent agent for each of our clients. 
Being independent from any banks or brokerage firms, we 
remain unconflicted and fully able to act in our clients’ best 
interests and to fulfil our fiduciary obligations. Everything we 
do is for our clients. We are fully transparent in terms of our 
costs – our only source of revenue is from client fees and we 
make no money from spreads.

Our operational risk management
We assume full operational risk on behalf of our clients – 
our infrastructure, systems and processes are designed to 
mitigate and minimise the operational risk associated with 
managing clients’ currency mandates.

Our distribution process
•  Our products are delivered both through segregated 

mandates and pooled fund structures to suit individual 
client requirements.

•  We distribute both through direct sales to institutional 

clients, and through local and global investment 
consultants.

•  We build long‑term relationships with investment 
consultants and help develop their understanding 
of our products and services.

10

Record plc Annual Report 2020

Business model

About  
us

Business 
model

Markets

Strategic 
priorities  
and goals

Key 
performance 
indicators

Operating 
review

Finance  
and risk

Corporate 
social 
responsibility

How we generate cash

What we deliver

Revenue generation
Our revenue comes from management fees and performance 
fees. Management fees are charged based upon levels of 
Assets Under Management Equivalents (“AUME”). Fee rates 
vary between products and clients depending on factors such 
as product type, mandate size and the level of tailoring to 
individual client requirements. Performance fees are typically 
charged as a percentage of investment performance above a 
benchmark or a previous higher valuation “high water mark”. 

Expenditure
Record is a service company and our biggest asset is 
our people. The majority of the Group’s costs comprise 
personnel costs, representing remuneration for individuals 
across all areas of the business including the client‑facing 
teams and the teams responsible for managing the Group’s 
operations and infrastructure. The Group also has 
non‑personnel costs representing, for example, 
the overheads incurred in running and maintaining 
the offices day‑to‑day, and payments to suppliers.

Investment
Cash can be used for investment purposes such as the 
seeding of new funds or investment into new infrastructure 
and technology.

Delivering value
By building strong relationships with our clients and 
providing high levels of client service and tailored solutions, 
we generate value for our clients, employees, shareholders 
and our other stakeholders.

Net operating  
cash inflow of 

£6.5m

Further details of cash 
generation on page 128.

Our products
Bespoke solutions – we operate Hedging mandates 
and unfunded Currency for Return mandates as bespoke, 
segregated mandates, using robust operational systems built 
to manage exposures efficiently and to minimise operational 
risk. Our Currency for Return strategies can also be delivered 
through a pooled fund structure.

Find out more about our products on pages 14 to 17.

Premium client service
Superior service is core to our client proposition and we 
achieve this on various levels by assigning a dedicated and 
experienced team to oversee each client portfolio. Direct 
communication between our operational and administrative 
specialists with each client’s own internal functions builds on 
the general level of interaction with the client and underpins 
the overall “trusted adviser” relationship.

Rewarding careers
At Record we have created an environment which 
encourages bright, dynamic and committed individuals 
to flourish. We provide excellent career prospects and the 
opportunity to work closely with senior and experienced 
people and for talented individuals to have responsibility 
at early stages of their career.

Thought leadership
Over the last 37 years Record has developed a leading 
position in its sector. Our knowledge of the currency market 
is sustained by our research and results in innovative 
products and continued process enhancement.

Shareholder value
We aim to operate an effective and efficient capital policy, 
and to deliver business growth and maximise shareholder 
returns over the long term. The Group’s dividend policy 
aims to return any excess of future earnings over ordinary 
dividends and additional capital requirements to 
shareholders, potentially in the form of special dividends.

Record plc Annual Report 2020

11

Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional informationBusiness model: our stakeholders

Our stakeholders

How we engage

Clients

Clients are the central focus of 
Record’s business. The Group’s 
resilience and ongoing success is 
built upon the ability to understand 
clients’ evolving needs and respond 
to them accordingly.

Shareholders

Record relies on the support and 
engagement of its shareholders to 
deliver its strategic objectives and 
grow the business. 

People

Record’s people are central to the 
ongoing success of the business 
and the Group aims to attract, 
retain, develop and motivate the 
right people for current and future 
business needs.

Society

Record recognises the 
responsibility it has to the local 
community, wider society and the 
environment.

The Group’s operational infrastructure is built around the specific requirements of our clients, including systems and 
controls to reduce risk and manage each stage of the process as efficiently as possible.

The Client Team builds lasting relationships with current and potential clients to develop a clear view of client objectives 
and how these will evolve.

Regular review meetings with clients ensure client requirements are consistently monitored.

a robust risk framework, transparency, value 

for money and maintaining the high levels of 

service they receive and bespoke products 

fulfilling their needs.

Our clients’ material interests relate to the 

The change of Chief Executive Officer and refreshed business strategy has further enhanced Record’s 

performance of Record’s products after fees, 

client‑led focus.

The Group Chief Executive and Chief Financial Officer presented the full‑year and half‑year results to major investors. 

Our shareholders want Record to ensure it is a 

The change of PR firm has enhanced media and market communications and enabled Record to expand 

The primary means of communicating with shareholders are through the Annual General Meeting, the Annual Report 
and Accounts, half‑year results and related presentations. All of these are available on the Company’s website and the 
Interim Report and Annual Report and Accounts are sent to all shareholders. The Group’s website also contains 
information on the business of the Company, corporate governance, all regulatory announcements, key dates in 
the financial calendar and other important shareholder information.

We engage with our employees through a variety of channels including a company intranet, management briefings, 
e‑mail updates and presentations by the Group Chief Executive to discuss progress made by the business, together 
with future objectives and challenges.

The Group seeks to encourage employees in developing their careers, offering assistance in such forms as study 
support and the possibility of secondments to overseas offices.

The Group’s remuneration framework includes schemes aimed at aligning employees’ interests with those of 
shareholders by offering them the opportunity to share in our success through share ownership.

long‑term sustainable business which delivers 

the reach of its news and business both to existing and new potential shareholders.

attractive returns through share price growth and 

regular dividends.

The Chair of the Nomination Committee contacted certain institutional shareholders to discuss changes 

to the UK Corporate Governance Code requirements related to the tenure of the Chairman.

Our people’s material interests relate to the 

Tim Edwards was appointed the designated Non‑executive Director responsible for workforce 

working and cultural environment provided by 

engagement and reporting to the Board on employee viewpoints.

The amendment of the Group Profit Share Scheme to be more objectives driven has enabled Record 

to better reward the contributions of individuals directly and this has been welcomed by employees.

Record. They want to be fairly rewarded for their 

contribution and have opportunities for learning, 

growth, further development and to share in the 

business success.

We are proud to support the communities in which Record operates and have a long history of contributing through 
monetary donations, gift giving and employee time. Further details can be found on pages 46 to 49.

We are keen to promote responsible investing and have incorporated environmental, social and governance (“ESG”) 
issues into some of our currency management products. Record has been a signatory to the Principles for Responsible 
Investment since June 2018. 

Record aims to manage the business in a 

manner which minimises its impact on the 

environment and helps to benefit society.

Employees helped to raise £15,242 for local and national charities during the year.

Record has now been certified carbon neutral for over eleven years.

In December 2019, Record launched an Impact Bond strategy, investing in international and regional 

multi‑lateral organisations which are signatories of the UN Sustainable Development Goals. Further details 

can be found on page 46.

External suppliers and service providers

Record relies on the use of 
external suppliers and service 
providers to supplement the 
Group’s own infrastructure, 
benefiting from the expertise 
these suppliers provide. 

Regulators 

As a global business, Record 
seeks to have transparent and 
open relationships with its 
regulators around the world. 
Regulators provide key oversight 
of how the business is run, thereby 
offering comfort to our clients.

We maintain a close working relationship with all our suppliers and service providers, with regular review of contracts 
and arrangements in place performed as part of the budgeting process.

All material supplier contracts are subject to due diligence checks and contracts are thoroughly reviewed by Record’s 
in‑house legal team before signing. Signed service level agreements are in place for all critical suppliers.

Record has a supplier payment policy which ensures that all invoices are approved and duly paid within agreed terms.

Our suppliers wish to develop mutually beneficial 

An update of trading application software was undertaken during the year which involved working closely 

working relationships over the long term.

with the supplier to ensure a successful upgrade which met Record’s trading and record keeping 

requirements within the timescale and cost budget set at the start of the project.

Record has an experienced Head of Compliance and Risk to manage the compliance function and oversee 
regulatory matters.

Record engages directly and through its membership of various industry bodies with regulators and policymakers as 
appropriate to ensure that our business understands and contributes to evolving regulatory requirements.

The Audit and Risk Committee receives regular reports from the Head of Compliance and Risk which cover the Group’s 
regulatory processes and procedures and its relationship with regulators. The reports also outline the material changes 
in the regulatory environment in which the Group operates.

Regulators want to ensure that Record’s 

business is run responsibly with the best 

interests of its clients at the centre of everything 

it does. They seek to protect the integrity of the 

financial systems they supervise and promote 

fair competition for the benefit of clients.

Record has complied with the latest version of the UK Corporate Governance Code as deemed 

appropriate given the size and nature of the business.

Compliance with the new SMCR regime was achieved by the 9 December regulatory deadline.

Section 172 Companies Act 2006

We set out in the above table our key stakeholder groups, their 
material issues and how we engage with them. Each stakeholder 
group requires a tailored engagement approach to foster effective 
and mutually beneficial relationships.

By understanding our stakeholders, we can factor into 
Boardroom discussions the potential impact of our decisions on 
each stakeholder group and consider their needs and concerns, 
in accordance with s172 of the Companies Act 2006.

12

Record plc Annual Report 2020

Business model: our stakeholders

The Group’s operational infrastructure is built around the specific requirements of our clients, including systems and 

controls to reduce risk and manage each stage of the process as efficiently as possible.

The Client Team builds lasting relationships with current and potential clients to develop a clear view of client objectives 

and how these will evolve.

Regular review meetings with clients ensure client requirements are consistently monitored.

Our clients’ material interests relate to the 
performance of Record’s products after fees, 
a robust risk framework, transparency, value 
for money and maintaining the high levels of 
service they receive and bespoke products 
fulfilling their needs.

The change of Chief Executive Officer and refreshed business strategy has further enhanced Record’s 
client‑led focus.

Their material issues

2020 highlights

Record relies on the support and 

The Group Chief Executive and Chief Financial Officer presented the full‑year and half‑year results to major investors. 

The primary means of communicating with shareholders are through the Annual General Meeting, the Annual Report 

and Accounts, half‑year results and related presentations. All of these are available on the Company’s website and the 

Interim Report and Annual Report and Accounts are sent to all shareholders. The Group’s website also contains 

information on the business of the Company, corporate governance, all regulatory announcements, key dates in 

the financial calendar and other important shareholder information.

Our shareholders want Record to ensure it is a 
long‑term sustainable business which delivers 
attractive returns through share price growth and 
regular dividends.

The change of PR firm has enhanced media and market communications and enabled Record to expand 
the reach of its news and business both to existing and new potential shareholders.

The Chair of the Nomination Committee contacted certain institutional shareholders to discuss changes 
to the UK Corporate Governance Code requirements related to the tenure of the Chairman.

Record’s people are central to the 

We engage with our employees through a variety of channels including a company intranet, management briefings, 

ongoing success of the business 

e‑mail updates and presentations by the Group Chief Executive to discuss progress made by the business, together 

and the Group aims to attract, 

retain, develop and motivate the 

right people for current and future 

business needs.

with future objectives and challenges.

The Group seeks to encourage employees in developing their careers, offering assistance in such forms as study 

support and the possibility of secondments to overseas offices.

The Group’s remuneration framework includes schemes aimed at aligning employees’ interests with those of 

shareholders by offering them the opportunity to share in our success through share ownership.

Our people’s material interests relate to the 
working and cultural environment provided by 
Record. They want to be fairly rewarded for their 
contribution and have opportunities for learning, 
growth, further development and to share in the 
business success.

Tim Edwards was appointed the designated Non‑executive Director responsible for workforce 
engagement and reporting to the Board on employee viewpoints.

The amendment of the Group Profit Share Scheme to be more objectives driven has enabled Record 
to better reward the contributions of individuals directly and this has been welcomed by employees.

Record recognises the 

We are proud to support the communities in which Record operates and have a long history of contributing through 

responsibility it has to the local 

monetary donations, gift giving and employee time. Further details can be found on pages 46 to 49.

community, wider society and the 

environment.

We are keen to promote responsible investing and have incorporated environmental, social and governance (“ESG”) 

issues into some of our currency management products. Record has been a signatory to the Principles for Responsible 

Investment since June 2018. 

Record aims to manage the business in a 
manner which minimises its impact on the 
environment and helps to benefit society.

Employees helped to raise £15,242 for local and national charities during the year.

Record has now been certified carbon neutral for over eleven years.

In December 2019, Record launched an Impact Bond strategy, investing in international and regional 
multi‑lateral organisations which are signatories of the UN Sustainable Development Goals. Further details 
can be found on page 46.

External suppliers and service providers

We maintain a close working relationship with all our suppliers and service providers, with regular review of contracts 

and arrangements in place performed as part of the budgeting process.

All material supplier contracts are subject to due diligence checks and contracts are thoroughly reviewed by Record’s 

in‑house legal team before signing. Signed service level agreements are in place for all critical suppliers.

Record has a supplier payment policy which ensures that all invoices are approved and duly paid within agreed terms.

Our suppliers wish to develop mutually beneficial 
working relationships over the long term.

An update of trading application software was undertaken during the year which involved working closely 
with the supplier to ensure a successful upgrade which met Record’s trading and record keeping 
requirements within the timescale and cost budget set at the start of the project.

Record has an experienced Head of Compliance and Risk to manage the compliance function and oversee 

regulatory matters.

Record engages directly and through its membership of various industry bodies with regulators and policymakers as 

appropriate to ensure that our business understands and contributes to evolving regulatory requirements.

The Audit and Risk Committee receives regular reports from the Head of Compliance and Risk which cover the Group’s 

regulatory processes and procedures and its relationship with regulators. The reports also outline the material changes 

in the regulatory environment in which the Group operates.

Regulators want to ensure that Record’s 
business is run responsibly with the best 
interests of its clients at the centre of everything 
it does. They seek to protect the integrity of the 
financial systems they supervise and promote 
fair competition for the benefit of clients.

Record has complied with the latest version of the UK Corporate Governance Code as deemed 
appropriate given the size and nature of the business.

Compliance with the new SMCR regime was achieved by the 9 December regulatory deadline.

Clients

Clients are the central focus of 

Record’s business. The Group’s 

resilience and ongoing success is 

built upon the ability to understand 

clients’ evolving needs and respond 

to them accordingly.

Shareholders

engagement of its shareholders to 

deliver its strategic objectives and 

grow the business. 

People

Society

Record relies on the use of 

external suppliers and service 

providers to supplement the 

Group’s own infrastructure, 

benefiting from the expertise 

these suppliers provide. 

Regulators 

As a global business, Record 

seeks to have transparent and 

open relationships with its 

regulators around the world. 

Regulators provide key oversight 

of how the business is run, thereby 

offering comfort to our clients.

Section 172 Companies Act 2006

This in turn ensures we deliver offerings our clients want and need, 
continue to work effectively with our colleagues and suppliers, 
comply with regulatory requirements, make a positive contribution 
to local communities and achieve long‑term sustainable returns for 
our investors.

Acting in a fair and responsible manner is a core element of our 
business practice, as seen in our Corporate social responsibility 
report on pages 46 to 49.

Record plc Annual Report 2020

13

Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional informationBusiness model: our products

The Group’s suite of core products is split into two main categories: 
Currency Risk Management and Return-Seeking products. We also 
offer bespoke solutions tailored to individual client requirements.

Currency Risk Management

Record’s primary risk management products are the hedging products and are predominantly systematic in nature. Record has 
the experience and expertise to deliver tailored hedging programmes to suit the individual currency needs of our clients.

We continually enhance our product offerings so that they maintain their premium product status. In a competitive marketplace, 
our ability to differentiate our hedging products is key to maintaining and growing our market share further.

CPH

DH

SH

AF

Core Passive 
Hedging

Since 1999

Dynamic 
Hedging

Since 1983

Signal Hedging

Since 2016

Audit and 
Fiduciary 
Execution

Since 2003

EPH

Enhanced 
Passive 
Hedging

Since 2014

EM

Emerging Market Momentum Hedging

Since 2014

EM

MP  Multi-product

14

Record plc Annual Report 2020

Business model: our products

Return‑Seeking

Record’s Return‑Seeking strategies have the generation of investment return as their principal objective.

Alternative risk premia investing

Alpha investing

CMS

ESG

DMC

ESG in 
Currency

Since 2018

Dynamic 
Macro 
Currency

Since 2019 
(live since 
2004)

Currency Multi-Strategy

Since 2012

Carry

Since 2003

Emerging Market (“EM”) Currency

Since 2009

Currency Momentum

Since 2012

Currency Value

Since 2012

Range Trading

Since 2018

MP  Multi-product

Record plc Annual Report 2020

15

Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional informationBusiness model: our products continued

Currency Risk Management

Passive Hedging
Passive Hedging mandates have the cost‑effective reduction of 
currency risk as their sole objective. This is achieved through 
symmetrical and unbiased elimination of currency exposure from 
clients’ international portfolios.

CPH

Core Passive Hedging
The core Passive Hedging product requires execution and operational expertise 
to a greater extent than investment judgement, and provides the following 
benefits to clients:

• 

Independent, best execution

•  Custom benchmarks

•  Optimised exposure capture

•  Netting benefits

•  Regulatory reporting

•  Management of cash flows

EPH

Enhanced Passive Hedging
The enhanced Passive Hedging product offers the same benefits and requires 
the same level of execution and operational expertise as the core product, but 
recognises the opportunities presented for adding value by taking advantage of 
structural inefficiencies and behavioural changes arising in FX markets. It requires 
continuous monitoring, investment judgement and specialised infrastructure to 
identify the opportunities and then to take advantage of them with a structured 
and risk‑managed approach.

DH

Dynamic Hedging
Record’s Dynamic Hedging product is an attractive alternative to 
Passive Hedging and has reduction of currency volatility as well as 
generating value as dual objectives. The Dynamic Hedging product 
seeks to allow our clients to benefit from foreign currency strength 
while protecting them from foreign currency weakness relative to 
their own base currency.

Value is generated entirely through the asymmetric reduction of 
pre‑existing currency risk and Dynamic Hedging’s ability to outperform 
Passive Hedging is dependent on trending in currency markets.

SH

Signal Hedging
Record has a licensing agreement with WisdomTree, the New 
York‑headquartered exchange‑traded fund and exchange‑traded 
product sponsor and asset manager, under which it provides 
signals that are used to dynamically hedge currency exposures 
within WisdomTree’s rules‑based index family, and which includes 
the hedging of emerging market currencies.

Since Record is not managing the exchange‑traded funds included 
under such licences, assets under management in these funds do 
not contribute to Record’s AUME. Record reports revenues arising 
from these licensing agreements under “Other currency services 
income”.

AF

Audit and fiduciary execution
Record offers transparent and cost‑effective fiduciary execution for 
clients wishing to undertake foreign exchange transactions (spot 
and forward) which are unrelated to their currency hedging or 
investment mandates. All trades are executed by Record (as agent) 
in the client’s name, and in accordance with best execution 
practices. Clients benefit from both the wholesale pricing Record is 
able to achieve for their trades, as well as from the knowledge that 
their transactions are undertaken on a best execution basis.

For clients whose FX transactions are undertaken by a third party 
(e.g. FX custodian), Record offers currency audits using 
comprehensive price data (both internal and externally sourced). 
Our reports are able to shed light on the quality of execution and 
highlight to our clients where there may be scope for improvement.

EM

Emerging Market Momentum Hedging
Whilst emerging market (“EM”) currency exposure is generally 
expected to deliver positive returns through time, EM currencies 
are more volatile than their developed market counterparts and are 
sensitive to many of the same macro‑economic factors which drive 
local equity and bond markets. This can add further pressure to 
portfolio performance during challenging market environments.

Record’s EM Momentum Hedging is intended to help investors 
principally concerned with drawdown protection by improving the 
downside risks of holding EM currency exposures. Through an 
early warning indicator, EM currency exposure is temporarily 
phased‑out from the portfolio, helping to protect investors during 
rapid market sell‑off phases.

16

Record plc Annual Report 2020

Business model: our products continued

Return‑Seeking

CMS

Currency Multi-Strategy
The Currency Multi‑Strategy range includes five principal 
strategies, being Carry, Emerging Market, Momentum, Value 
and Range Trading and it is possible to offer these in either a 
segregated or pooled fund structure.

These strategies can be combined in different weightings 
that appeal to particular market segments under Record’s 
Multi‑Strategy approach, which can be applied as an “overlay” 
to help clients achieve a variety of investment objectives, and offers 
clients access to the main sustainable sources of return in the 
currency market. Clients receive a diversified return stream which 
performs well under a variety of market conditions and reduces the 
correlation of their currency programme to other asset classes. 
Further detail on each of the five principal strands is given below:

Carry
The Forward Rate Bias is the observation that higher‑yielding currencies tend 
to outperform lower yielding currencies over longer time periods, and is regarded 
by Record as a fundamental and structural currency risk premium. The Carry 
strategy aims to exploit this observation and generate returns by buying selected 
developed market higher interest rate currencies and selling selected lower 
interest rate currencies.

Emerging Market (“EM”) currency
EM currencies offer investors an opportunity either to seek a return from such 
currencies or to seek to separate the currency effect from the underlying overseas 
domestic asset performance (typically equities or bonds). Record believes that as 
a result of convergence in the levels of economic output between emerging and 
developed markets, holding EM currencies offers the benefit of real exchange 
rate appreciation as well as offering higher positive real yields. This currency 
appreciation has been a significant contributor of returns to (developed market) 
holders of EM assets including equities and bonds.

Currency Momentum
This strategy exploits the periodic tendency of the spot exchange rate to 
appreciate after a prior appreciation, and to depreciate after a previous 
depreciation. This market inefficiency has persisted across different currencies 
and is present in other asset classes, such as equities. Currency is commonly 
thought of as “trending” and the Momentum strategy seeks to make a return 
from this phenomenon.

Currency Value
Research suggests that purchasing power parity (“PPP”) valuation models have 
been good predictors of the long‑term direction of spot movements. Currency 
Value strategies exploit this insight, buying currencies that are undervalued 
relative to PPP and selling currencies that appear overvalued.

Range Trading
The Range Trading strategy exploits the tendency for certain currency pairs to 
trade within narrow ranges.

The philosophy comes from the observation that spot rate volatility is excessive 
when measured daily, but dissipates over a one‑to‑three month period. This 
stems from the fact that demand and supply of FX over certain time frames is 
random and disjointed, resulting in the spot rate reacting to maintain equilibrium 
in short‑term supply and demand. Much of the flow in the FX markets is a 
by‑product of economic activity (importing or exporting of goods or services, 
cross‑border M&A transactions) or a consequence of quasi‑systematic processes 
(such as passive rolling of FX hedges). In view of the above, many participants in 
the FX markets will continue to transact despite adverse price movements, 
informing our view that this is a reliable risk premium. Additionally, recent 
regulatory changes in the FX markets have decreased the extent to which 
traditional market makers can cushion supply and demand shocks by holding 
inventory, which may exacerbate this tendency. This elevated volatility must 
compensate capital with a sufficient return.

ESG

ESG in Currency
Research has shown that the institutional framework of a 
country plays an important role in its economic growth, with better 
institutions leading to higher growth and also lower volatility, paving 
the way for a more sustainable path for the country. Our approach 
to ESG first reviews a wide currency universe from an institutional, 
social, and political perspective with the objective of determining 
which currencies to accept in our strategy. We then identify 
pro‑ESG factors towards which we can tilt exposures, increasing 
the sustainability of the overall portfolio whilst maintaining its 
return‑seeking characteristics. Factors are reviewed both 
quantitatively and qualitatively and are applied to tilt the portfolio 
and to inform our discretionary risk management. They are drawn 
from a number of the United Nations Development Programme’s 
(“UNDP’s”) Sustainable Development Goals (“SDGs”) which we 
believe serve as advanced indicators for higher productivity growth; 
so by systematically incorporating ESG in alignment with the 
UNDP’s SDGs, we expect to produce positive risk‑adjusted returns.

DMC

Dynamic Macro Currency
The Dynamic Macro Currency strategy utilises a modern, 
multi‑disciplined investment approach to developed and emerging 
market currencies. A four‑pillared proprietary process integrates 
macroeconomics, market neurology, and quantitative price metrics 
with disciplined risk management. The team’s analyses target the 
generation of a variant perception of future market price direction. 
The portfolio is innovatively structured and managed to implement 
investment views and provide an upside asymmetric return profile. 
Historically, the long‑term track record has been negatively correlated 
with traditional asset classes such as the S&P500, but has also 
provided positive risk‑adjusted returns during “risk on” environments.

John Floyd is the Portfolio Manager of the Dynamic Macro Currency 
strategy. Prior to joining Record in 2019, Mr. Floyd ran a successful 
Global Macro Hedge Fund for over twelve years and has previously 
worked for a number of leading institutions including Merrill Lynch, 
UBS, Swiss Bank Currency Fund and Deutsche Bank.

MP

Multi-product
Multi‑product mandates typically have combined risk‑reducing and 
return‑seeking objectives, and are bespoke in nature. These may 
include a hedging mandate overlaid with selected elements of the 
Currency for Return product, which cannot readily be separated into 
its hedging and return‑seeking components for reporting purposes.

Cash and other
Record also provides ancillary services including cash and liquidity 
management, collateral management and derivatives overlays.

Information on product investment performance is given in the 
Operating review section (pages 30 to 33).

Record plc Annual Report 2020

17

Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional informationMarkets: our market environment and industry trends

Our market

Global and macro trends

Industry trends

The currency market represents the biggest 
and most liquid market available, with 
exceptionally low transaction costs and 
daily FX volumes averaging $6.6 trillion 
(source: BIS Triennial Central Bank Survey 
of Foreign Exchange and OTC Derivatives 
Markets 2019). The FX market is essential 
to global trade and finance and includes a 
high proportion of not‑for‑profit or forced 
participants, resulting in profit‑seeking 
financial institutions continuing to represent 
a minority of FX market participants. 
Consequently, the market displays 
persistent patterns of behaviour or 
inefficiencies which Record believes can 
best be exploited by a combination of 
systematic and discretionary processes.

The FX market continues to offer 
opportunities for investors. Record’s 
expertise is in identifying and understanding 
these opportunities and then working with 
clients to understand how such 
opportunities may be used to their best 
advantage, taking account of each client’s 
individual circumstances and attitude 
to risk. 

Margin compression  
and value for money
The average margin on our hedging 
products and across the industry generally 
has been under pressure over time from 
clients seeking to reduce fees in a low yield 
environment, for example by the use of 
competitive fee pressure or through 
increased tailoring of their product for 
no increase in fees.

Brexit 

The UK formally left the European Union 
(“EU”) on 31 January 2020 and entered the 
transition period, during which it continues 
to follow EU rules whilst the negotiations 
continue on the future relationship. 
Whilst the UK Government has previously 
committed to the conclusion of the transition 
period by the end of 2020, this was prior to 
the emergence of covid‑19 and a full 
understanding of its effects on the global 
economy and the distraction from, and 
consequent delay to, Brexit negotiations. 
At the time of writing, it remains uncertain 
on how the negotiations on the future 
relationship will conclude.

What this means  
for our business

What this means  
for our business

Record does business in a market subject 
to constant fee pressure and competition, 
and has done so successfully for many 
years. We have built our business based 
on the highest levels of client service, 
innovative products, robust infrastructure 
and professional expertise. During periods 
of relative calm in FX markets, it may be 
natural for clients to underestimate the 
potential dangers of volatility, or the value 
delivered through such high service levels 
and expertise. However, changing cycles 
add to uncertainty in markets and bring 
heightened volatility and reduced liquidity. 

Consequently, opportunities continue for 
Record to illustrate the value to clients of 
its expertise and experience collected over 
37 years, and to provide innovative 
products to react to clients’ needs. Such 
opportunities are only further heightened 
by more extreme market conditions such 
as the current covid‑19 pandemic.

Record has performed a client‑by‑client 
assessment of the regulatory basis on 
which we currently provide services to 
EU27 clients. As a result, and in addition 
to industry‑wide measures such as the 
Memoranda of Understanding agreed 
between the Financial Conduct Authority 
and EU regulators previously announced, 
at the time of writing we are confident we 
will be able to continue to provide services 
to all current EU27 clients post‑Brexit, 
even in the event of a “hard Brexit” with no 
extension to the transition period or no 
other equivalence arrangements. 

Subject to negotiations, it remains possible 
that we would be constrained in marketing 
our products and services to new clients in 
certain EU27 countries, although even this 
constraint is moderated by enabling 
legislation in many such countries, allowing 
authorised UK firms to continue to market 
to professional clients. The situation will be 
subject to further assessment in the light of 
any regulatory changes, but the 
establishment of an authorised subsidiary 
within the EU27 countries to eliminate any 
such remaining constraints remains a 
possibility subject to an assessment of the 
costs and benefits of doing so. 

Despite this uncertainty, and as explained 
above, we expect to be able to continue to 
serve all our current EU27 clients, 
irrespective of whether and how the UK 
leaves the European Union.

18

Record plc Annual Report 2020

Markets: our market environment and industry trends

About  
us

Business 
model

Markets

Strategic 
priorities  
and goals

Key 
performance 
indicators

Operating 
review

Finance  
and risk

Corporate 
social 
responsibility

Industry trends

Price  
transparency
Recent years have seen a move towards 
heightened transparency over costs and 
fees across our industry, driven by 
regulatory pressure aimed at fair 
competition and consistent methods of 
reporting, and the need to build investor 
confidence and trust in the sector generally.

Advances in 
technology
Over recent years technological advances 
have changed the way in which businesses 
in our sector need to operate. This includes 
how data is collected and analysed for 
investment purposes, having the ability 
to trade using electronic platforms and 
algorithms, enabling improved client 
reporting processes, and introducing 
efficiencies in more manual processes 
and procedures. The speed of change is 
dramatic and will continue to change the 
way business is done in our sector 
going forward.

The changing pattern 
of FX liquidity provision
Historically the role of liquidity providers and 
market makers in the FX markets has been 
filled by investment banks. However, this 
role is now increasingly being filled by 
players other than banks due to the 
increased regulatory burden and capital 
constraints imposed on banks following 
the financial crisis.

What this means  
for our business

What this means  
for our business

What this means  
for our business

Technology has a critical role to play in 
our business, both to create efficiency 
to deliver reliable low cost solutions for 
clients, and to drive innovation in creating 
new products and markets. Technologies 
such as artificial intelligence and machine 
learning, as well as improvements in data 
science and the ability to utilise 
opportunities offered through third party 
systems, can all contribute to the aim of 
improving our investment management 
products and services. As a result, the 
need to continue to observe and invest in 
technology and innovation is paramount to 
protect our capability to respond effectively 
to disruption and change in our markets, 
as well as to support our investment 
management processes and systems, 
improve client service and enhance our 
operating efficiency and effectiveness.

Market stress or increased volatility can 
cause large differentials in the pricing of 
derivatives due to the lack of market 
makers including those banks previously 
willing to take risk onto their balance sheet. 
In extreme circumstances, the risk of 
reduced liquidity increases exponentially 
such that those market participants not 
expert in navigating the financial markets 
or without relationships built over many 
years with liquidity providers will either be 
forced to pay significantly increased 
spreads, or may not be able to trade at all 
depending on their method of accessing 
the market. Such circumstances provide 
opportunities for our business to offer 
unconflicted and independent expertise 
in navigating such markets, ensuring as far 
as possible best execution and access to 
liquidity that would otherwise not be 
accessible.

Record acts in a fiduciary capacity for its 
clients with the continuing obligation to 
provide best execution and to ensure full 
transparency and disclosure of all fees for 
the investment management services 
provided to its clients. We welcome and 
fully support all initiatives aimed at 
achieving full transparency of fees and 
charges within our industry. In this respect 
we have previously worked closely with 
the FCA’s Institutional Disclosure Working 
Group (“IDWG”), and more latterly on the 
Cost Transparency Initiative (“CTI”) in 
conjunction with the Investment 
Association, Pensions and Lifetime 
Savings Association (“PLSA”) and the 
Local Government Pension scheme 
(“LGPS”) Advisory Board, using our 
knowledge and experience within the FX 
markets to help create a new framework 
for the reporting of charges and costs to 
pension scheme clients. Record is a 
signatory to the LGPS Investment Code of 
Transparency. We believe that fulfilling the 
long‑term aim of achieving full cost 
transparency across the investment 
management industry can only be in the 
best interests of all clients, whilst ensuring 
a level playing field and providing 
opportunities for firms such as ours already 
providing full transparency over costs and 
fees to its clients.

Record plc Annual Report 2020

19

Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional informationMarkets: market review

FX volatility was broadly contained in the first half of the year, 
although it changed abruptly in the first quarter of 2020 as 
the severity of the covid-19 pandemic became apparent.

Review of the year ended 31 March 2020
The first half of the financial year saw a re‑escalation of trade 
tensions between the US and China following what proved to be 
a short‑lived truce. The visible effects on global trade and activity 
compelled major central banks to embark on easing cycles and by 
December several had cut rates – including the Federal Reserve 
three times. FX volatility was broadly contained and the relative 
strength of the US economy meant that the US dollar was 
supported versus most other developed market currencies.

The global economic outlook shifted abruptly in the first quarter of 
2020. As the severity of the covid‑19 pandemic became apparent, 
governments rushed to shutter economies and all non‑essential 
activity in order to prevent the spread of the virus. The unprecedented 
sudden stop in activity led to a scramble for credit by businesses 
globally in order to stay afloat and cover lost revenues. The surge in 
credit demand and highly uncertain outlook saw credit spreads widen 
sharply and equity markets quickly fall into bear market territory. 
With the prospect of an economic and liquidity shock transforming 
into a financial and solvency shock, policymakers acted with a 
greater sense of urgency than even in the global financial crisis. 
In order to prevent an economic depression, developed market 
central banks conducted emergency rate cuts, and most either 
restarted quantitative easing programmes or began new ones.

The Federal Reserve unveiled a raft of measures designed to ease 
credit conditions in the US economy and extended its infamous FX 
swap lines to foreign central banks to ensure adequate US dollar 
supply abroad. The fiscal response came later but also in force, 
with governments unveiling packages for the provision of business 
loans and guarantees, and income replacement for displaced 
workers. By the end of March, the lines between fiscal and 
monetary policy had blurred, but the herculean effort on the part 
of policymakers appeared to have prevented an immediate 
financial collapse.

The acute demand for US dollars drove the world’s reserve 
currency notably higher against most developed market currencies, 
while the Japanese yen and Swiss franc were supported by strong 
external asset positions and the convergence of short‑term 
developed market yields towards the zero lower bound. As might 
be expected, emerging market currencies were negatively affected 
by the shock, with those countries starting from low bases of 
growth, lacking fiscal room, and with reliance on external funding 
falling the most. Asian emerging market currencies fared better 
as more effective containment measures and the ability to enact 
comprehensive fiscal packages provided relative economic shelter.

20

Record plc Annual Report 2020

Markets: market review

Coronavirus (“covid‑19”)
The covid‑19 pandemic has transformed economies and financial 
markets. Many sectors incompatible with “social distancing” have 
experienced substantial revenue and jobs losses. Reinforced by 
the fall in commodity prices, this vulnerability extends in some 
cases to entire national economies and currencies. Governments 
everywhere navigate the trade‑offs between virus containment 
and economic losses. Fiscal and monetary policies have been 
wielded worldwide to cover these losses. However, the capacity 
for policy response varies greatly among countries, as does the 
method and effect of implementation.

In the same way that many individuals are isolating at home to 
protect themselves or others from effects of the virus, we see 
isolationist tendencies in the response of national governments, 
sometimes even at the local level. In this sense, we expect 
covid‑19 to catalyse trends which had begun before it arrived: 
reduced trade, strained geopolitics, and hard borders. And yet, 
this is locked in a paradox with the dense dollarisation of global 
financial markets over the past decade. Indeed, one of the very 
first revelations coming from this crisis was just how dependent 
international (and local) finance was on US dollar liquidity. Just 
as governments closed borders, they also clamoured for the 
currency they shared with their neighbours.

We observed this demand for dollar liquidity across both spot 
and swap rates, which have emerged as a barometer of liquidity 
stress. The Federal Reserve and the IMF stepped in to fill the gap 
as nations, banks and corporations aimed to cover funding 
needs. And so as events unfold, we expect the interplay of the 
virus’s real economic impact, risk sentiment, the demand for 
dollar liquidity, and the supply to represent a dominant dynamic 
in international markets including FX.

Despite the gradual easing of restrictions, risks of an acute crisis 
have not passed, as losses continue to reverberate throughout 
economies and financial markets. Longer‑term risks have also 
appeared, and it remains to be seen what the impact on growth, 
productivity, price level and asset values is of extended policy 
measures, high debt levels, coordinated fiscal and monetary 
policy, and transformed social structure.

Beyond the economics of FX value, recent events have also had 
substantive effects on the structure of the FX market itself. Many 
of the structural changes observed over the past ten years – 
more electronic trading and significant non‑bank liquidity, blurring 
the line between participants and market makers – reversed in 
the blink of an eye. Even as banks’ risk capital faced new 
constraints (corporates drawing on credit lines; rising credit risk 
in their portfolios), they re‑emerged as sole market makers. 
Electronic trading is debilitated by volatile markets, with platform 
bid/ask spreads having reached an order of magnitude greater 
than voice quotes. Established trading relationships are proving 
more valuable than at any other time since 2009 or the Swiss 
franc peg break in 2015.

Please refer to the Risk management section on page 40 
to see how the Group has managed the impact of the 
covid‑19 pandemic.

Record plc Annual Report 2020

21

Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional informationStrategic priorities and goals

Our purpose is to deliver innovative, thought-leading 
and practical solutions to the needs of currency market users 
and investors, while maintaining independence and integrity.

We are a specialist currency manager

Strategy and goals
Our strategic priorities and goals are presented below under the 
three strategic areas, or cornerstones, which form the foundation 
to our strategy. Further detail on the associated risks is provided 
on pages 38 to 45.

Performance measurement
The Group uses key performance indicators (“KPIs”) to measure 
and monitor the performance of the Group. The financial and 
non‑financial KPIs are presented on pages 26 to 29.

Quality client 
experience

page 23

Technology 
and innovation

page 24

Talent 
development

page 25

We aim to build strong, long‑term “trusted adviser” 
relationships with our clients.

This is achieved through providing the highest levels 
of service to our clients through proactive 
relationships, informing clients on currency markets 
and opportunities, seeking to understand their 
currency issues and tailoring our products to meet 
their individual requirements.

Measured by – Revenue, operating profit margin, 
EPS, DPS, AUME, client numbers and client longevity

We aim to differentiate Record from our competitors 
by reinforcing our thought leadership through 
innovation and by investing in technology.

This is achieved through devising and implementing 
innovative solutions to meet unique client 
requirements in new products and services and by 
enhancing existing products and strategies. Advances 
in technology help us to ensure a scalable, robust and 
efficient method of delivery for our products and 
services.

Measured by – Operating profit margin, EPS, DPS, 
AUME, average number of employees

We aim to develop and retain a diverse pool of talent 
which is key both to delivery of a “best in class” 
business model, and to the long‑term stability of 
the business.

This is achieved through strong recruitment, career 
development and support systems to identify and 
retain talent aligned with both our culture and plans 
for generational change.

Measured by – EPS, AUME, average number of 
employees, staff retention and employees with 
equity interest

1

Risks:

Strategy, concentration, 
margin compression, 
people and employment, 
regulatory change, 
operational and investment

2

Risks:

Strategy, concentration, 
margin compression, 
people and employment, 
regulatory change, 
operational and investment

3

Risks:

Strategy, people and 
employment and 
investment

22

Record plc Annual Report 2020

Strategic priorities and goals

About  
us

Business 
model

Markets

Strategic 
priorities  
and goals

Key 
performance 
indicators

Operating 
review

Finance 
and risk

Corporate 
social 
responsibility

1

Quality client experience
We provide the highest levels of service to our clients through proactive 
relationships informing clients about currency markets and opportunities, 
seeking to understand their currency issues and tailoring our products to 
meet their individual requirements.

Initiatives
•  Focus on generational change 
to plan for future stability for 
business and client relationships

• 

Improve local presence in all key 
markets

•  Continue to provide the highest 

possible levels of service to clients 
at all times

•  Develop new products aligned 

with investor demand for 
ESG‑related strategies and the 
use of Frontier currencies in 
EM products

•  Focus on opportunities for existing 
clients to benefit from product 
enhancements and 
complementary services alongside 
current product range

Progress
•  New Global Head of Sales 
appointed in February 2020

•  Headcount increased in our 

Zürich office during the year to 
support the focus on sales and 
client service in Switzerland

•  Continuity of client service 

maintained despite 
unprecedented disruption due to 
covid‑19

•  Stronger relationships forged with 

clients through heightened 
communication and response 
during elevated volatility in FX 
markets

•  ESG/Impact offering in early 

stages of development

•  Frontier currencies seeded in EM 
currency product during the year

Priorities
•  Consider developing partnerships 

with trusted third parties to 
enhance distribution capabilities 
and service offering

•  Focus on enhancing investment 

consultant relationships

• 

Invest in technology to enhance 
the service offering to clients and 
the overall client experience

•  Continue research into 

diversification and enhancement 
of products and services

•  Further develop offerings for 

both ESG/impact and frontier 
currencies in EM currency 
products in response to client 
demand

Distribution

The Group’s sales and marketing activities are organised to ensure 
that resources are deployed where opportunities have been 
identified as giving the most likelihood of future success. The sales 
and marketing team is split between the offices in the UK, US and 
Switzerland, and a centralised team that provides comprehensive 
technical and administrative support to the sales offices operates 
from the headquarters based in the UK.

We distribute through both direct sales to institutional clients, 
and through local and global investment consultants. Building 
long‑term relationships with investment consultants and developing 
their understanding of our products and services is important to 
our continued success and our ability to deliver quality services to 
our clients. By working closely both with clients and investment 
consultants we can identify new business opportunities as the 
currency landscape continues to change and evolve.

Record plc Annual Report 2020

23

Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional informationStrategic priorities and goals continued

2

Technology and innovation
We aim to differentiate Record from our competitors by reinforcing our 
thought leadership through innovation and by investing in technology. 
We also constantly review our operational model to identify opportunities 
for process improvement and risk reduction.

Initiatives
•  Diversification of products and 
services through research and 
innovation

Progress
•  Dynamic Macro Currency strategy 
now live within Record – Currency 
Multi‑Strategy Fund

Priorities
•  Focus on opportunities for client 
collaboration and client‑led 
product development

•  Research opportunities for 

•  ESG/Impact offering in early 

•  Review opportunities for 

development of new products 
specifically to incorporate ESG/
Impact factors in currency‑related 
investment strategies

• 

Identify opportunities for 
incorporating new technology 
focused on enhancing clients’ 
experience, improving efficiency 
of processes and to strengthen 
security and business resilience

• 

Improve flexibility of operational 
systems to strengthen disaster 
recovery capability

stages of development

• 

Investment into ESG/Impact 
bonds to increase operational 
and reporting capabilities and 
experience linked to Impact 
offering

introducing third party systems to 
improve operational efficiency and 
capability

•  Continued investment in research 
to enhance existing products and 
services

•  Developed the innovative use of 

•  Disciplined approach to 

new product development 
opportunities, which must be 
client‑led and commercially viable

Frontier currencies in EM currency 
product during the year

•  New HR system introduced 
during the year to improve 
employee communication and 
engagement, and supporting 
SMCR procedures

• 

Invested in systems focused on 
increased security and resilience

•  Disaster recovery capability 

enhanced through introduction of 
flexible working systems allowing 
full working from home capability in 
response to the covid‑19 pandemic

Collaborative infrastructure

The Group’s operational infrastructure is built around how 
we service our clients and ensures a collaborative approach to 
promote innovation across all sections of the business. To this 
end, our teams are deliberately organised by function, rather than 
product. As such, all teams are involved (to a greater or lesser 
extent) in the day‑to‑day management or support of each client 
mandate. We maintain a purpose‑built and fully integrated 
end‑to‑end operational process to allow for scalable and 
customisable implementation of our products. Teams take 
a collaborative approach to ensuring that each product 
enhancement and every process improvement is 
implemented seamlessly with a client‑centric focus.

24

Record plc Annual Report 2020

Strategic priorities and goals continued

3

Talent development
We aim to develop and retain a diverse pool of talent which 
is key both to delivery of a “best in class” business model, 
and to the long‑term stability of the business.

Initiatives
•  Focus on generational change to 
plan for future stability of business 
and client relationships

•  Providing a collaborative office 
environment which enables 
early‑career employees to benefit 
from working alongside senior 
colleagues

• 

Investing in the physical and 
mental wellbeing of our colleagues 
as well as continued professional 
development

•  Promoting innovation through 

alignment with variable 
remuneration

Progress
•  New Global Head of Sales 

• 

• 

appointed in February 2020 and 
new hires in US and Swiss offices

Investment in technology to 
enhance communication channels 
between Group entities and retain 
close working links with 
colleagues whilst working 
from home

Introduction of workforce 
development and training on 
areas such as confidence and 
resilience, gender equality and 
unconscious bias

•  Group Profit Share Scheme now 
more fully aligned with individual 
contribution and operating 
performance

Priorities
•  To ensure the wellbeing of all 

of our staff working from home 
during the covid‑19 lockdown 
period

•  To liaise with staff and to carefully 
plan for the transition back to our 
offices as covid‑19 restrictions 
ease

•  To consider the shape of future 

work patterns to align the 
interests of our employees 
with those of our business

•  Renewed vigour in continuing 
to plan for generational change

•  To continue to invest in 

the development, retention, 
wellbeing and diversity of 
our talented employees

• 

Introduction of 
commission‑related scheme 
to reward the introduction of 
sustainable new business

•  Alignment of pension 

contributions across staff grades 
by April 2022

Recruitment

Staff retention, motivation and development

The recruitment process is carefully structured and run 
predominantly in‑house to ensure that talented people with the 
right skills and experience are recruited into the Group. As part 
of this, the Group runs a successful internship programme, which 
gives the Group the opportunity to benefit from talented individuals 
who are in the early stages of their career and identified as 
potentially having the necessary skills required to add value to the 
business in the future. The process continues with a 
comprehensive induction programme for all new joiners to allow 
them to adapt to the specialist environment within Record.

We invest heavily in our people, offering opportunities and 
support for them to grow their knowledge, skills and capabilities. 
An effective performance review and objective‑setting process, 
personal development planning including the development of 
career paths, together with our open and inclusive office culture, 
are all key priorities in the development and retention of our staff. 
In addition, the Group Share Scheme, the Group Profit Share 
Scheme and the Record plc Share Incentive Plan promote the 
acquisition of equity in the Company by staff, improving motivation 
and retention, as well as aligning employees’ interests with those of 
our clients and shareholders. At 31 March 2020, the proportion of 
employee shareholders stood at 69% (2019: 70%).

Record plc Annual Report 2020

25

Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional informationKey performance indicators

Measuring our performance 
against our strategy.

Financial KPIs

Revenue 
(£m)
Revenue is earned mainly from the 
provision of currency management 
services in the form of management 
fees and performance fees.

Operating profit margin 
(%)
Operating profit margin is an 
alternative performance measure, 
calculated by dividing operating 
profit by revenue.

Basic earnings per share 
(“EPS”) (pence per share)
The Group aims to create 
shareholder value over the long term, 
illustrated by a consistent growth 
in EPS.

2020

2019

2018

2017

2016

25.6

25.0

23.8

23.0

21.4

2020

2019

2018

2017

2016

30

32

31

34

32

2020

2019

2018

2017

2016

3.26

3.27

3.03

2.91

2.55

Why this is important
EPS measures the overall 
effectiveness of the business model 
and drives both our dividend policy 
and the value generated for 
shareholders.

Link to strategy:  1    2    3

Why this is important
Revenue is a key indicator of client 
experience, growth and a key driver 
of profitability. AUME growth, fee 
levels sustained through product 
enhancement, and investment 
performance in excess of 
benchmarks all contributed to 
revenue growth during the year.

Link to strategy:  1    2

Why this is important
Operating profit margin is an indicator 
of the efficiency of the business in 
turning revenue into profit. Margin 
compression has been a factor 
across the sector over a number of 
years, which continues to impact the 
business as discussed further under 
Industry trends on page 18. Further 
information can be found under the 
Financial review section on page 36.

The Group aims to increase the 
operating profit margin over time 
through investment in resources and 
technology to maintain its premium 
products and services, whilst 
increasing operating efficiency and 
developing more diversified revenue 
streams in higher margin products.

Link to strategy:  1    2    3

26

Record plc Annual Report 2020

Key performance indicators

About  
us

Business 
model

Markets

Strategic 
priorities  
and goals

Key 
performance 
indicators

Operating 
review

Finance 
and risk

Corporate 
social 
responsibility

Financial KPIs

The Board and Executive Committee use both financial and non-financial key 
performance indicators (“KPIs”) to monitor and measure the performance of the 
Group against its strategic priorities. Some KPIs link to specific strategic areas as 
noted below, whilst others represent higher level key metrics in terms of the Group’s 
business and financial performance.

Key

1

2

3

Quality client experience

Technology and innovation

Talent development

Dividends per share (“DPS”) 
(pence per share)
The Group’s policy is that total distributions in any year will be covered by earnings. 
The Group aims to pay a progressive ordinary dividend and return surplus capital to 
shareholders where it is in excess of business requirements, usually in the form of 
special dividends.

Ordinary

Special

2020

2019

2018

2017

2.30

2.30

2.30

2.00

2020

2019

2018

2017

0.41

0.69

0.50

0.91

2016

1.65

2016

Nil

Why this is important
Repeatable dividend payments illustrate the cash generative nature of Record’s 
business and its strength in converting profits into cash, and providing a suitable 
return to shareholders. The ordinary dividend per share is unchanged on last year. 
The special dividend per share has decreased by 0.28 pence, resulting in a 41% 
decrease in total dividends to 2.71 pence per share (2019: 2.99 pence per share).

Link to strategy:  1    2    3

Record plc Annual Report 2020

27

Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional informationKey performance indicators continued

Non‑financial KPIs

AUME 
($ billion)
As a currency manager, Record 
manages only the impact of foreign 
exchange and not the underlying 
assets of its clients, therefore its AUM 
(Assets Under Management) are 
notional. To distinguish this from the 
AUM of conventional asset managers, 
Record uses the concept of Assets 
Under Management Equivalents 
(“AUME”) and by convention this 
is quoted in US dollars. AUME is an 
alternative performance measure 
and further detail on how it is defined 
is provided on page 132.

Clients 

Client numbers represent the number 
of separate legal entities that have 
appointed Record directly as an 
investment manager or invested 
in a Record fund at the year end, 
and acts as an indicator of 
business growth.

Client longevity 
(%)
Client longevity measures how 
long Record has been providing 
currency management services to 
each client with a mandate active 
at 31 March 2020.

2020

2019

2018

2017

2016

58.6

57.3

62.2

58.2

52.9

2020

2019

2018

2017

2016

72

>10yrs

22%

65

6‑10yrs

14%

60

59

58

3‑6yrs

1‑3yrs

0‑1yrs

22%

28%

14%

Why this is important
AUME is a key driver of future 
revenue and an indicator of business 
growth. AUME increased by 2.3% for 
the year, including net inflows of 
$4.6 billion, notwithstanding the 
negative impact of covid‑19 on 
the final quarter of the year.

Link to strategy:  1    2    3

Why this is important
The sustained growth in client 
numbers is indicative of successful 
client engagement, quality client 
experience and the building of strong 
“trusted adviser” relationships.

Why this is important
Client longevity is both an indicator of 
recent client growth, and also of the 
Group’s success in sustaining quality 
client relationships through 
investment cycles.

Link to strategy:  1

Link to strategy:  1

28

Record plc Annual Report 2020

Key performance indicators continued

Non‑financial KPIs

Key

1

2

3

Quality client experience

Technology and innovation

Talent development

Average number 
of employees 
The average number of 
employees through the year 
includes Non‑executive Directors.

Staff retention 
(%)
Staff retention is the number of 
employees who were employed by 
Record throughout the period as 
a percentage of the number of 
employees at the beginning of 
the period.

Employees with  
equity interest (%)
The percentage of employees who 
own shares in Record plc at year end.

2020

2019

2018

2017

2016

82

85

81

73

69

2020

2019

2018

2017

2016

81

84

93

83

88

2020

2019

2018

2017

2016

69

70

72

68

69

Why this is important
Average employee numbers is an 
indicator of growth and also of 
how effectively the Group is using 
technology to make processes 
more efficient.

Link to strategy:  2    3

Why this is important
The Group’s third cornerstone is 
talent development, which includes 
the development and retention of our 
talented employees. Whilst every 
business expects a degree of 
employee turnover, the monitoring of 
employee retention acts as a general 
indicator for factors affecting our 
employees’ wellbeing, development, 
and issues such as longer‑term 
succession.

Link to strategy:  3

Why this is important
The alignment of employee interests 
with those of our shareholders is an 
important factor in ensuring the 
longer‑term success of our business 
and is an important tool in managing 
generational change.

Link to strategy:  3

Record plc Annual Report 2020

29

Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional informationOperating review

AUME increased by 2.3% in US dollar terms, 
assisted by aggregate net inflows of $4.6 billion 
across the year.

Product investment performance
Hedging
Our hedging products are predominantly systematic in nature. 
The effectiveness of each client mandate is assessed regularly 
and adjustments are made when necessary in order to respond 
to changing market conditions or to bring the risk profile of the 
hedging mandate in line with the client’s risk tolerance.

Passive Hedging
Record has developed an enhanced Passive Hedging service, 
which aims to reduce the cost of hedging by introducing new 
flexibility into the implementation of currency hedges without 
changing the hedge ratio. While the strategy is partly systematic, 
the episodic nature of many opportunities exploited by the strategy 
means it requires a higher level of discretionary oversight than has 
historically been associated with Passive Hedging. Exceptional 
levels of volatility in the FX derivatives market during the latter part 
of the year has negatively affected some clients. However, for 
others this volatility has increased the scope of opportunities 
available.

The table below shows the total value added relative to a 
fixed‑tenor benchmark for an enhanced Passive Hedging 
programme for a representative account.

Return for  

year to  Return since 
inception1

31 March 2020 

Value added by enhanced  
Passive Hedging programme relative  
to a fixed‑tenor benchmark 

(0.05%)  0.09% p.a.

Dynamic Hedging
The performance of our Dynamic Hedging product depends on 
how the foreign currencies change in value relative to the base 
currency of a client. During the year, US investors saw losses 
from currency on international assets when valuing positions in 
US dollars, as the US dollar appreciated against the majority of 
G10 currencies. Record’s Dynamic Hedging product adjusted 
hedge ratios in line with US dollar fluctuations, and on aggregate 
helped protect clients against currency losses.

Return for  

year to  Return since 
inception2 

31 March 2020 

Value added by  
Dynamic Hedging programme 

0.80%  0.54% p.a.

Currency for Return
Record’s Currency for Return suite of products includes both 
systematic and discretionary investment styles. The systematic 
offering combines five strategies under the Currency Multi‑Strategy 
product, whilst the Dynamic Macro Currency product uses a more 
discretionary approach.

Currency Multi‑Strategy
Record’s principal Currency for Return product during the year was 
Currency Multi‑Strategy. This combines a number of diversified 
return streams, which include:

•  Forward Rate Bias (“FRB”, also known as Carry) and Emerging 
Market strategies which are founded on market risk premia and 
as such perform more strongly in “risk on” environments; and

•  Momentum, Value and Range Trading strategies which are 

more behavioural in nature, and as a result are less 
risk‑sensitive.

Record’s Multi‑Strategy mandates delivered negative overall 
performance over the year. The first three quarters saw cumulative 
outperformance but gains were more than offset by losses in the 
final quarter as a result of the covid‑19 pandemic.

Dynamic Macro Currency
The Dynamic Macro Currency strategy utilises a modern, 
multi‑disciplined investment approach to developed and emerging 
market currencies. A four‑pillared proprietary process integrates 
macroeconomics, market neurology, and quantitative price metrics 
with disciplined risk management, with analysis targeting the 
generation of a variant perception of future market price direction. 
The portfolio is innovatively structured and managed to implement 
investment views and provide an upside asymmetric return profile. 
Historically, the long‑term track record has been negatively 
correlated with traditional asset classes such as the S&P500, 
but has also provided positive risk‑adjusted returns during 
“risk on” environments.

Over the year, the portfolio benefited from our independent 
research ethos and risk management discipline, including early 
recognition of the potential severity and global feedback 
mechanisms of covid‑19. The strategy was able to develop early, 
proprietary models to monitor the impact of the virus. Successful 
management of the portfolio across various currencies, 
instruments, and time horizons resulted in a +0.82 excess 
return‑to‑risk ratio for the year ending 31 March 2020.

1.  Since inception in October 2014.
2.  Since inception in April 2009.

30

Record plc Annual Report 2020

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Operating review

About  
us

Business 
model

Markets

Strategic 
priorities  
and goals

Key 
performance 
indicators

Operating 
review

Finance 
and risk

Corporate 
social 
responsibility

Fund name 

Currency Multi‑Strategy Fund1  

Returns 

Dynamic Macro Currency2  

Record Multi‑Strategy composite3  

Return for  
  12 months to 
  31 March 2020 
% 

Scaling 

Return since  Volatility since 
inception 
% p.a.

inception 
% p.a. 

4.5‑6 

(7.82%) 

(5.42%) 

9.11%

Return for  
  12 months to  
  31 March 2020 
% 

Return since  Volatility since 
inception 
% p.a.

inception 
% p.a. 

4.20% 

(3.84%) 

4.25% 

0.60% 

9.30%

3.14%

Scaling
The Currency for Return product group allows clients to select 
the level of exposure they desire in their currency programmes. 
The segregated mandates allow clients to select the level of 
scaling and/or the volatility target. The pooled funds have 
historically offered clients a range of scaling and target 
volatility levels.

It should be emphasised that in this case “scaling” refers to the 
multiple of the aggregate notional value of forward contracts in 
the currency programme, to the segregated mandate size or 
the pooled fund’s net assets. This is limited by the willingness 
of counterparty banks to take exposure to the segregated client 
or pooled fund. The AUME of those mandates where scaling or 
a volatility target is selected is represented in Record’s AUME at 
the scaled value of the mandate, as opposed to the segregated 
mandate size or the pooled fund’s net assets.

AUME development
AUME expressed in US dollar terms finished the year at 
$58.6 billion, an increase of 2.3% (2019: $57.3 billion). When 
expressed in sterling, AUME increased by 7.5% to £47.3 billion 
(2019: £44.0 billion).

AUME development bridge – year to 31 March 2020 ($bn)

+4.6

-3.2

-0.1

57.3

58.6

AUME at 
1 April 
2019

Net flows

Markets

FX effects 
and scaling 
adjustments

AUME at
31 March 
2020

1.  Record Currency Multi‑Strategy Fund return data is since inception in February 2018, GBP base.
2.  Dynamic Macro data is since inception in January 2004.
3.  Record Multi‑Strategy composite is since inception in July 2012, showing excess returns data gross of fees in USD base, and scaled to a 4% target volatility.

Record plc Annual Report 2020

31

Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional information 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Operating review continued

AUME development continued
AUME movements
Passive Hedging AUME increased by 4.3% to $50.3 billion at the 
end of the year (2019: $48.2 billion), including inflows of $2.0 billion 
from new clients, and net inflows of $2.1 billion from adjustments 
by existing clients. Market movements had an impact of reducing 
AUME by $2.2 billion, whilst movements in exchange rates had a 
much smaller positive impact, increasing AUME by $0.2 billion.

Dynamic Hedging AUME ended the year at $2.5 billion 
(2019: $3.1 billion), a decrease of 19% represented by the impact 
of market movements which reduced AUME by $0.8 billion,  
and was partially offset by net inflows from existing clients of  
$0.2 billion.

Notwithstanding net inflows of $0.3 billion during the year, 
Currency for Return AUME remained broadly unchanged at 
$2.6 billion at the end of the year (2019: $2.7 billion). Movements 
in exchange rates and scaling adjustments on mandates with fixed 
target volatilities both decreased AUME by $0.3 billion and 
$0.1 billion respectively.

AUME composition by underlying asset class as at 31 March 2020

Multi‑product AUME started and ended the year at $3.0 billion. 
Tactical positions taken by clients during the year temporarily 
increased AUME in the third quarter, which subsequently reversed 
in the fourth quarter as a result of market movements.

Market performance
Record’s AUME is affected by movements in market levels 
because substantially all the Passive and Dynamic Hedging, and 
some of the Multi‑product mandates, are linked to equity, fixed 
income and other market levels. Market movements decreased 
AUME by $3.2 billion in the year ended 31 March 2020 
(2019: increased $2.3 billion).

Further detail on the composition of assets underlying our Hedging 
and Multi‑product mandates is provided below to help illustrate 
more clearly the impact of equity and fixed income market 
movements on these mandate sizes.

Passive Hedging 

Dynamic Hedging 

Multi‑product 

Equity  
% 

28% 

90% 

0% 

Fixed 
income 
% 

39% 

0% 

0% 

Other 
%

33%

10%

100%

32

Record plc Annual Report 2020

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Operating review continued

Forex
Approximately 89% of the Group’s AUME is non‑US dollar denominated. Therefore, foreign exchange movements may have an impact on 
AUME when expressing non‑US dollar denominated AUME in US dollars. Foreign exchange movements increased AUME by $0.1 billion 
over the year. This movement does not have an equivalent impact on the sterling value of fee income.

At 31 March 2020, the split of AUME by base currency was 13% in sterling, 55% in Swiss francs, 11% in US dollars, 15% in euros and 
6% in other currencies.

AUME composition by base currency

Base currency 

Sterling 

US dollar 

Swiss franc 

Euro 

Australian dollar 

Canadian dollar 

Singapore dollar 

Swedish krona 

Product mix
AUME composition by product

Passive Hedging 

Dynamic Hedging  

Currency for Return 

Multi‑product 

Cash  

Total  

  31 March 2020  31 March 2019

  GBP 6.3bn  GBP 5.7bn

USD 6.2bn  USD 6.3bn

  CHF 31.0bn  CHF 32.5bn

EUR 8.1bn 

EUR 8.3bn

AUD 1.6bn  AUD 1.0bn

CAD 3.5bn  CAD 0.6bn

SGD 0.0bn  SGD 0.1bn

SEK 3.9bn 

SEK 3.7bn

31 March 2020 

31 March 2019

US $bn 

50.3 

2.5 

2.6 

3.0 

0.2 

% 

86% 

4% 

4% 

5% 

1% 

US $bn 

48.2 

3.1 

2.7 

3.0 

0.3 

%

84%

5%

5%

5%

1%

58.6 

100% 

57.3 

100%

The mix of AUME remained broadly consistent with the prior year, with aggregate Hedging AUME representing 90% (2019: 89%).

Record plc Annual Report 2020

33

Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional information 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Financial review

Overview
Total revenue for the year increased by 2.4% to £25.6 million 
(2019: £25.0 million) and operating expenses, excluding variable 
remuneration, increased by 6.8% to £14.2 million. Variable 
remuneration rose to £3.5 million (2019: £3.4 million), with the 
operating profit margin decreasing to 30% (2019: 32%) and profit 
before tax fell by 3.2% to £7.7 million (2019: £8.0 million).

Profit and loss (£m)

Revenue 

Cost of sales 

Gross profit 

Personnel (excluding GPS) 

Non‑personnel cost 

Other income or expense 

Total expenditure (excluding GPS) 

GPS 

Operating profit 

Operating profit margin 

Net interest received 

Profit before tax 

Tax 

Profit after tax 

2020 

25.6 

(0.3) 

25.3 

(8.6) 

(5.7) 

0.1 

(14.2) 

(3.5) 

7.6 

30% 

0.1 

7.7 

(1.3) 

6.4 

2019

25.0

(0.4)

24.6

(8.2)

(5.1)

—

(13.3)

(3.4)

7.9

32%

0.1

8.0

(1.6)

6.4

The Group has shown its resilience 
through a challenging year, and 
remains independent and profitable 
supported by its strong and liquid 
balance sheet.

Steve Cullen
Chief Financial Officer

Revenue
Record’s revenue derives from the provision of currency 
management services, fees for which can be charged through 
management fee only or management plus performance fee 
structures, which are available across Record’s product range. 
Management fee only mandates are charged based upon the 
AUME of the product, and management plus performance fee 
structures include a lower percentage fee applied to AUME, and a 
proportional share of the specific product performance measured 
over a defined period.

Management fees are typically charged on a quarterly basis, 
although Record may charge fees monthly for some of its larger 
clients. Performance fees can be charged on quarterly, six‑monthly 
or annual performance periods on the basis agreed with the 
particular client.

As shown under AUME development on page 31, average levels 
of AUME, and hence management fees, increased across the year 
predominantly as a result of net inflows of $2.0 billion and 
$2.6 billion over the first and second halves respectively. These 
were partially offset by net decreases due to market movements 
for the year of $3.2 billion. The period up to the last quarter of the 
year showed an increase of $1.3bn, followed by a $4.5 billion 
decrease in the final quarter linked to the covid‑19 outbreak.

Record’s aggregate revenue for the year increased by 2.4% to 
£25.6 million, including performance fees of £1.8 million (2019: 
£2.3 million).

Management fees earned during the year increased by 3.7% to 
£23.1 million (2019: £22.3 million). The increase in management 
fees of £0.8 million more than offset the decrease in performance 
fees of £0.5 million for the year.

34

Record plc Annual Report 2020

 
Financial review

About  
us

Business 
model

Markets

Strategic 
priorities  
and goals

Key 
performance 
indicators

Operating 
review

Finance  
and risk

Corporate 
social 
responsibility

Revenue 

£25.6m
2019: £25.0m
+2.4%

Revenue analysis (£m)

Year 
ended 
31 Mar 2020 

Year 
ended 
31 Mar 2019

Performance fees
Performance fees are derived from a combination of hedging 
and return‑seeking products. Aggregate performance fees of 
£1.8 million were earned during the year (2019: £2.3 million).

Management fees 

Passive Hedging 

Dynamic Hedging 

Currency for Return 

Multi‑product 

Total management fees 

Performance fees 

Other currency services income 

Total revenue 

12.0 

11.6

4.0 

2.0 

5.1 

23.1 

1.8 

0.7 

25.6 

4.6

1.8

4.3

22.3

2.3

0.4

25.0

Management fees
Passive Hedging management fees increased by £0.4 million to 
£12.0 million for the year, an increase of 3.6% (2019: £11.6 million) 
in line with the higher average Passive Hedging AUME over the year.

Dynamic Hedging management fees fell by 13.1% to £4.0 million 
(2019: £4.6 million), predominantly reflecting the reduction in 
AUME seen in the final quarter of last year, partially offset by net 
inflows this year of $0.2 billion.

Currency for Return management fees increased by 11.7% to 
£2.0 million, reflecting movements in AUME including net inflows 
of $0.3 billion. Multi‑product management fees increased by 
18.6% to £5.1 million, bolstered by the temporary tactical 
mandate activity seen in the second half of the year.

Average management fee rates remained broadly constant 
throughout the year ended 31 March 2020. However, the trend 
of increased margin pressure seen in recent years across our 
industry continues, with clients seeking reduced fees rates or 
increased tailoring for existing fees, especially across our Passive 
Hedging offering.

Other currency services income
Other currency services income totalled £0.7 million 
(2019: £0.4 million) and consists of fees from ancillary currency 
management services including collateral management, signal 
hedging and tactical execution services. Fees charged for 
these ancillary services are not linked to AUME.

Expenditure
Cost of sales
Cost of sales comprises referral fees and costs in relation to the 
Record Umbrella Fund.

Operating expenditure
The Group operating expenditure (excluding variable 
remuneration) increased by 6.8% to £14.2 million for the year 
(2019: £13.3 million).

Growth in personnel costs of 4.9% to £8.6 million (2019: 
£8.2 million) reflects salary increases arising as a result of internal 
promotions during the year, plus the effect of recruiting at more 
senior levels towards the end of the financial year. The full‑year 
effect of these movements will be reflected in an increase in 
personnel costs for the forthcoming year.

Non‑personnel costs increased by 11.8% during the year to 
£5.7 million (2019: £5.1 million). The Group continued to invest in 
technology and to improve the resilience of its systems, reflected 
by an increase in IT‑related costs of £0.3 million which are 
expected to increase in the forthcoming year. One‑off 
project‑related costs totalled £0.3 million, including 
technical consultancy and professional fees.

Other income was £0.1 million for the year (2019: £nil) and 
represents net gains made on derivative financial instruments 
employed by the Group’s seed funds, hedging activities and 
other FX adjustments or revaluations.

Record plc Annual Report 2020

35

Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional information 
 
 
 
Financial review continued

Expenditure continued
Group Profit Share (“GPS”) Scheme
The Group operates a discretionary GPS Scheme i.e. variable 
remuneration, which is linked to both the financial performance of 
the Group and the achievement against individual performance 
objectives for staff. Historically a long‑term average of 30% of 
underlying operating profit before GPS (“GPS pool”) has been 
made available to be awarded to staff. However, for the year ended 
31 March 2020 the Remuneration Committee introduced changes 
to the operation of the scheme with the aim of rewarding individual 
employee behaviour that drives revenue growth, improvements to 
efficiency and reduced costs. Consequently the expectation is that 
the average GPS % will now diverge from the long‑term average 
due to the Remuneration Committee using the flexibility and 
discretion it already holds in varying the GPS pool between 25% 
to 35% of underlying operating profit before GPS.

For the year ended 31 March 2020, the GPS pool is 31.4% of 
pre‑GPS underlying operating profit, which represents £3.5 million, 
an increase of 3.8% over the previous financial year (2019: 
£3.4 million).

Further information on variable remuneration, and specifically the 
changes to the operation of the Group Profit Share Scheme from 
1 April 2019, can be found in the Remuneration report starting on 
page 70.

Operating profit and margin
Group operating profit decreased by 2.9% to £7.6 million (2019: 
£7.9 million) and the Group operating margin decreased to 30% 
(2019: 32%). Notwithstanding the increase in revenue for the year, 
the continued investment in personnel and other resources for the 
year have impacted the operating margin.

Cash flow
The Group consolidated statement of cash flows is shown on 
page 99 of the financial statements.

The Group’s year‑end cash and cash equivalents stood at 
£14.3 million (2019: £13.0 million). The cash generated from 
operating activities before tax is shown in note 25 to the financial 
statements and was £7.9 million (2019: £8.2 million). During the 
year, taxation of £1.4 million was paid (2019: £1.2 million) and 
£5.9 million was paid in dividends (2019: £5.5 million).

At the year end, the Group held money market instruments with 
maturities between three and twelve months, worth £8.0 million 
(2019: £10.7 million). These instruments are managed as cash by 
the Group but are not classified as cash under IFRS rules (see note 
18 of the financial statements for more details).

Dividends
An interim ordinary dividend of 1.15 pence per share (2019 interim: 
1.15 pence) was paid to shareholders on 27 December 2019, 
equivalent to £2.3 million.

As disclosed in the Chairman’s statement on page 4, the Board is 
recommending a final ordinary dividend of 1.15 pence per share, 
equivalent to £2.3 million, taking the overall ordinary dividend for 
the financial year to 2.30 pence per share. Simultaneously, 
the Board is also paying a special dividend of 0.41 pence 
equivalent to £0.8 million making the total dividend in respect of 
the year ending 31 March 2020 of £5.3 million equivalent to 83% 
of total earnings.

The total ordinary and special dividends paid in respect of the 
prior year ended 31 March 2019 were 2.3 pence per share and 
0.69 pence per share respectively, equivalent to total dividends of 
£5.9 million and representing 91% of total earnings of 3.27 pence 
per share.

36

Record plc Annual Report 2020

Financial review continued

Regulatory capital resources (£m)

Core Tier 1 capital  

Deductions: intangible assets 

Regulatory capital resources 

2020 

28.0 

(0.4) 

27.6 

2019

27.3

(0.3)

27.0

Further information regarding the Group’s capital adequacy 
information can be found in the Group’s Pillar 3 disclosure, which 
is available on the Group’s website at www.recordcm.com.

Cautionary statement
This Annual Report contains certain forward‑looking statements 
with respect to the financial condition, results, operations and 
business of Record. These statements involve risk and uncertainty 
because they relate to events and depend upon circumstances 
that will occur in the future. There are a number of factors that 
could cause actual results or developments to differ materially from 
those expressed or implied in this Annual Report. Nothing in this 
Annual Report should be construed as a profit forecast.

Financial stability and capital management
The Group’s balance sheet is strong and liquid with total net assets 
of £28.2 million at the end of the year, including current assets 
managed as cash totalling £22.3 million. The business remains 
cash generative, with net cash inflows from operating activities 
after tax of £6.5 million for the year (see note 25 to the financial 
statements).

The Board’s capital policy is to retain minimum capital (being 
equivalent to shareholders’ funds) within the business broadly 
equivalent to twelve months’ worth of future estimated operating 
expenses (excluding variable remuneration), plus capital assessed 
as sufficient to meet regulatory capital requirements and working 
capital purposes, and for investing in new opportunities for the 
business. To this end, the Group maintains a financial model to 
assist it in forecasting future capital requirements over a three‑year 
cycle under various scenarios and monitors the capital and liquidity 
positions of the Group on an ongoing and frequent basis. The 
Group has no debt.

Record Currency Management Limited (“RCML”) is a BIPRU limited 
licence firm authorised and regulated in the UK by the Financial 
Conduct Authority (“FCA”), and is a wholly owned subsidiary of 
Record plc. Both RCML and the Group submit semi‑annual capital 
adequacy returns to the FCA, and held significant surplus capital 
resources relative to the regulatory financial resource requirement 
throughout the year.

The Board has concluded that the Group is adequately capitalised 
both to continue its operations effectively and to meet regulatory 
requirements, due to the size and liquidity of balance sheet 
resources maintained by the Group.

The Group held regulatory capital resources based on the audited 
financial statements as at 31 March (excluding non‑controlling 
interests), as follows:

Record plc Annual Report 2020

37

Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional information 
Risk management

Record’s culture is one of integrity and accountability, 
and is embedded into the control environment across 
all areas of the business.

The Board has ultimate responsibility for risk and the oversight of 
the risk management process within the business. Recognising 
that risk is inherent in all of the Group’s business dealings, and in 
the markets and instruments in which the Group operates, it places 
a high priority on ensuring an integrated approach and a strong risk 
management culture is embedded throughout the Group, with 
accountability at all levels within the business. Effective risk 
management and strong internal controls are integral to the 
Group’s business model and are reflected in the risk management 
framework adopted within the business.

Risk management framework
Risk appetite
As part of its responsibility for the oversight of the risk management 
process, the Board determines the risk appetite of the business. 
This defines the risk tolerances within which the business must 
operate in order to achieve its strategic and business objectives, 
and takes into account the interests of clients, employees and 
shareholders as well as any capital or any other regulatory 
requirements. The Board’s ICAAP (Internal Capital Adequacy 
Assessment Process) considers the risk appetite statement and 
the process used for the monitoring of key risks against defined 
thresholds to ensure adverse trends or levels of heightened risk are 
identified and appropriately escalated for action if required.

The Board reviews and considers the principal risks, and its risk 
appetite and tolerances, on a regular and ongoing basis in light of 
strategic plans, and changes in the business and regulatory 
environment. The Board currently considers the following 
categories of risk in determining the risk appetite of the Group:

Capital adequacy risk
Capital adequacy risk is the risk that the Group is unable to 
support its strategic business objectives due to not meeting its 
minimum regulatory capital. The Group has a capital and dividend 
policy, which is designed to ensure that capital retained is broadly 
equivalent to one year’s worth of estimated future overheads 
(excluding variable remuneration), in addition to capital assessed as 
required for regulatory purposes, for working capital purposes and 
for investing in new opportunities for the business. 

This policy ensures a significant capital buffer over regulatory 
requirements, and consequently capital adequacy risk is not 
considered a significant risk in terms of the principal risks 
detailed on pages 41 to 44.

The business is also exposed to more overarching risks, being 
conduct risk and reputational risk.

Conduct risk
Conduct risk is defined as the risk of causing detriment to a client 
or damaging the integrity of the market because of poor systems 
or processes, or inappropriate judgement by staff in execution of 
the Group’s business. The conduct of our staff and the strength of 
our internal control systems and processes are fundamental to the 
effective operation of the Group’s risk management framework. 
The conduct risk is therefore evident and managed within each 
individual category of risk, and when combined equates to the 
overall conduct risk of the Group. Consequently, conduct risk is 
not considered as a separate risk category within the Principal 
risks section on pages 41 to 44.

Risk management framework – overview

Record Board

Executive Committee

Audit and Risk Committee

Investment Committee

Risk Management Committee

38

Record plc Annual Report 2020

Risk management

Reputational risk
Reputational risk is the risk of loss or adverse impact arising 
from an unfavourable perception of the Group on behalf of clients, 
counterparties, employees, regulators, shareholders or other 
stakeholders. Reputational risk can manifest as a consequence 
of an occurrence of any of the Group’s principal risks, either in 
isolation or together with other risks, and is therefore considered to 
form an integral part of each of the Group’s principal risks. For this 
reason, reputational risk is not considered as a separate risk 
category within the Principal risks section on pages 41 to 44.

The remaining principal risk categories are listed below and further 
detail is given on pages 41 to 44: 

Strategic risk

Business risk

Operational risk

Investment risk

Oversight
Oversight of the risk management framework is governed 
by various committees as delegated by the Board.

The Board has delegated authority to the Audit and Risk 
Committee to provide oversight and independent challenge 
in relation to internal controls, risk management systems and 
procedures and external financial reporting.

The Executive Committee is the delegated decision‑making 
body for the day‑to‑day operation of the business and includes 
executive Board members and other senior personnel.

The Board has delegated authority to the Investment Committee to 
approve changes to any of the Group’s investment processes and 
to establish and maintain policies for these processes. 
The Investment Committee’s members are listed on page 61. 
Investment Committee approval is required prior to implementation 
of any new or amended investment process or product.

As prescribed in terms of reference determined by the Audit and 
Risk Committee, the Risk Management Committee continually 
reviews existing and new risks, and the nature of any operational 
incidents, with the objective of ensuring that adequate systems 
and controls are in place to minimise and preferably eliminate 
such incidents and their impact on clients and the Group.

Lines of defence
The Record culture is one of integrity and accountability; core 
values that are embedded into the control environment surrounding 
all areas of the business.

The overall risk management framework is underpinned by three 
lines of defence and is overseen by the Audit and Risk Committee, 
as delegated by the Board.

External independent assurance activity 

Statutory external audit

ISAE 3402 and AT-C320 
service auditor’s report 
on internal controls

Embedded culture of integrity and accountability

1st line of defence:

2nd line of defence:

3rd line of defence:

Business operations  
and support

Control and oversight 
functions

Internal audit 
(independent  
assurance – Deloitte)

Within this framework, the first line of defence provides 
management assurance and rests with line managers within their 
specific departments and with senior managers responsible for the 
implementation and maintenance of higher‑level controls to ensure 
adherence to quality standards and regulatory requirements. 
Functions such as Front Office Risk Management, Compliance and 
Risk, Legal, HR and Finance provide the second line of defence 
through the drafting, implementation and monitoring of policies and 
procedures to align with best practice, to ensure compliance and 
to provide assurance and oversight for the Board and the Audit 
and Risk Committee. 

Record plc Annual Report 2020

39

Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional informationRisk management continued

Lines of defence continued
The third line of defence is performed by internal audit, which 
provides independent assurance on the adequacy and effectiveness 
of the Group’s risk management, control and governance processes, 
providing recommendations to improve the control environment. 
Internal audit is provided by Deloitte LLP (“Deloitte”).

External independent assurance for shareholders is gained through 
the statutory annual external audit process run by 
PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP (“PwC”), the Group’s external 
auditor. The Group has commissioned RSM Risk Assurance 
Services LLP (“RSM”), an independent third party, to perform the 
annual service auditor’s report in respect of Record Currency 
Management Limited under both the International Standard on 
Assurance Engagement (“ISAE”) 3402 and the American Institute 
of Certified Public Accountants Attestation Standard AT‑C Section 
320 (“AT‑C 320”). In performing this work, RSM reports its opinion 
on the description of internal controls with respect to the 
investment management and information technology activities, the 
suitability of the design of the relevant controls, and the operating 
effectiveness of specific controls for the period 1 April to 31 March, 
in line with the Group’s financial year.

The Group considers the strong capital buffer retained under the 
capital and dividend policy provides an effective additional line of 
defence in terms of mitigation when considering its principal risks.

Emerging risks
Emerging risks are primarily external in nature and tend to overlay 
the Group’s existing principal risk categories. Emerging risks can 
include natural disasters, pandemics, disruption in financial 
markets and business infrastructure, political risk and changes in 
the competitive landscape. The Group Board, management and 
Risk Management Committee constantly monitor emerging risks, 
assessing the likelihood of impact on the principal risks faced by 
the business.

At the time of writing, the Coronavirus pandemic (“covid‑19”) has 
effectively temporarily shut down the world economy as global 
leaders fight to stop the spread of the virus through enforced 
lockdowns in their respective countries. Although some countries 
are beginning to ease restrictions as mortality rates decline, it 
remains to be seen whether a second wave of the virus ensues, 
and if not, how quickly the global economy returns to pre‑covid‑19 
levels, if at all. The speed and scale of disruption caused by the 
pandemic is unprecedented, meaning the risk has fully transitioned 
from an emerging risk to a business continuity risk.

Information on the Group’s response to the pandemic and the 
effect on its business and operations is given in more detail below.

Review of the impact of covid‑19
Our clients
Record’s clients are institutional and of high quality with strong, 
long‑standing and trusted relationships built over many years. 
Record has not lost any clients as a result of the covid‑19 
pandemic and has maintained strong lines of communication and 
service levels throughout the crisis, responding to client requests in 
volatile markets and restricted liquidity, and underpinning the 
quality of our service offering. A large proportion of our current 
client base by assets (90%) is represented by hedging products 
which seek to reduce the FX risk associated with our clients’ 
overseas assets – extreme volatility in times of market stress only 
serves to further reinforce the benefit of such risk mitigation 
strategies. 

The quality of our clients is reflected in the business having not 
suffered from any unpaid fees for over 20 years through various 
market crises and cycles, and we do not anticipate this changing 
under the current circumstances.

Our people
Record has successfully transitioned to full remote working without 
detriment to our clients or employees. We continue to closely 
monitor the wellbeing and motivation of all of our staff and to listen 
and respond to their feedback and requirements. Planning has 
begun for the easing of restrictions and how these may impact the 
return to “normal” working conditions in terms of social distancing, 
travel, increased office hygiene requirements and other measures. 
Record has not seen any employee attrition as a result of the crisis, 
has not cut wages and does not anticipate utilising any of the 
Government’s job retention or loan schemes for businesses.

Our technology and operations
Prior to the UK Government imposed lockdown, Record’s 
operational teams, had already been split between the disaster 
recovery (“DR”) site and the Windsor office, and this changed to 
full working from home for all employees, including all operational 
teams, subsequent to the lockdown measures being introduced. 
Throughout these phases full business continuity was maintained. 
Remote access systems have been strengthened and over the 
course of the lockdown additional IT equipment has been sourced 
for individuals to assist with facilitating the required working 
environment from home.

Our governance and oversight
Virtual meetings have replaced physical meetings in the office and 
broadly follow the same pattern as prior to the crisis, although the 
frequency for some meetings has been increased, for example 
more regular Audit and Risk Committee meetings to review risk 
and weekly Executive Committee catch‑ups to discuss employee 
wellbeing, market behaviour and other management issues.

Our risk and management reporting framework continues to 
operate as usual, as do monitoring and oversight tasks operated 
by the compliance team.

Our business model
With the exception of those items discussed above, any further 
impact of covid‑19 on our business model has been limited. 
Our costs have not materially increased as a result of the virus and 
our balance sheet remains well capitalised and robust. In terms of 
revenue, whilst we have not seen and do not anticipate any direct 
material outflows as a result of covid‑19, the link between some of 
our clients’ mandates with other markets, such as equity and fixed 
income, means our AUME is also affected to a lesser extent to 
movements in such markets. This was illustrated by the fall of our 
fourth quarter AUME by ‑$4.5 billion (‑7%) linked to market 
movements. Conversely, we would expect to see any rebound in 
such markets reflected by an increase in our AUME.

Our business has responded well to the changes enforced by 
the covid‑19 pandemic, with continuity in operational and client 
servicing matters, and maintaining a full team without the need for 
additional funding or Government assistance. We believe that we 
are capable of continuing to operate under current circumstances 
for the foreseeable future. 

Please see page 21 for analysis of the market impact of the 
covid‑19 pandemic.

40

Record plc Annual Report 2020

Risk management continued

Principal risks
The following section shows the Board’s assessment of the principal risks faced by the business alongside an explanation of how these 
risks have been managed or mitigated, and how the significance of the risk has changed during the year. These risks fall into a number of 
distinct categories and the means to mitigate them are both diverse and relevant to the nature of the risk concerned.

Strategic risk

The risk of failing to identify and implement the correct strategy would impact expected outcomes, earnings and profitability of the Group. 
This risk is influenced by internal and external factors.

Link to 
strategy

1

2

3

Risk

Failure to deliver strategy 
– risk of failure to achieve 
strategic objectives through 
internal or external factors.

Potential impact – reduced short 
to medium‑term profitability, and 
growth prospects and viability 
limited longer‑term.

Business risk

Rating

Change

Mitigating activities and update

Medium

The Board sets strategy and is responsible for ensuring the 
Group has the right structure, leadership and culture to 
execute.

Regular and ongoing review of strategic options, 
opportunities and threats.

A change of leadership was announced on 13 February 
2020 to deliver on growth opportunities anticipated by the 
business. 

The risk of the business being unable to generate fee income and to control costs in line with business plans. 

This risk is influenced by internal and external factors.

Link to 
strategy

1

2

Risk

Concentration risk – the risk of 
concentration either by product, 
client type or geographical 
location leading to over‑reliance 
on any one category of revenue.

Potential impact – Record’s 
products are all currency 
management based. A move 
away from currency by its core 
client base or a high‑value client, 
or a change in Swiss regulation, 
could result in material outflows 
and loss of revenue.

Rating

Change

Mitigating activities and update

Medium

Continued diversification of investment capabilities across 
risk‑reducing and return‑seeking products, plus the 
capability to offer bespoke products to meet client 
requirements.

Commitment to client services excellence and transparent 
investment process is integral to retention.

Building long‑term and close trusted adviser relationships 
with clients assists with retention even in the event of 
regulatory change or market uncertainty and disruption.

Client numbers and AUME increased in FY‑20. 
The addition of the Dynamic Macro Currency strategy 
adds further diversification to Record’s product range. 
Investigation continues into possibilities arising from impact 
investing, frontier currencies and ESG‑related opportunities 
in currency.

Key to strategy link
1  Quality client experience 

Record plc Annual Report 2020

2  Technology and innovation

3  Talent development

41

Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional informationRisk management continued

Business risk continued

Risk

Link to 
strategy

Rating

Change

Mitigating activities and update

Medium

Medium

Low

1

2

1

2

3

1

2

Margin compression – the risk 
of a lower fee environment due to 
changes in investor demand or 
competitive pricing pressures, 
and/or rising costs within the 
industry arising from regulatory 
requirements and/or technological 
advances.

Potential impact – reduced fee 
rates and/or increased costs lead 
to decreased margins and lower 
returns for shareholders.

People and employment risk 
– the inability to attract or retain 
key employees could impact the 
Group’s ability to support 
business activities or achieve 
strategic objectives. 

Potential impact – not 
supporting business activities or 
achieving the strategic objectives 
of the Group would lead to a 
material negative impact on 
corporate performance.

Regulatory change – the risk of 
failure by the Group to comply 
with the introduction of new 
regulation or changes to existing 
regulation.

Potential impact – ability to 
do business may be affected, 
resulting in loss of revenue or 
regulatory censure.

Bespoke solutions and added‑value to differentiate 
products within the market.

Focus on offering premium service differentiates Record 
from competition and builds long‑standing and “trusted 
adviser” relationships.

Continued investment into resources and technology to 
ensure effective and cost‑efficient processes.

Pressure on Passive Hedging fee rates has continued 
during the year. However, market uncertainty and volatility 
in the final quarter and since year end has served to 
underline to clients the benefits of having specialist 
advisers with proven expertise in managing complex 
financial and operational risk.

Continued investment in resources to broaden capabilities 
in research, investment and client servicing.

Promotion of collegiate and professional culture career 
opportunities study support and overseas secondments.

Remuneration policy and share‑based remuneration 
schemes promote key personnel retention.

Minimal reliance on key investment personnel and products 
managed on a predominantly systematic process.

The Group continues to focus on succession planning to 
mitigate the risk from over‑reliance on key personnel, as 
evidenced by the recruitment of a new Global Head of 
Sales prior to the year end and a new senior manager level 
hire post year end in our Swiss office.

Experienced Board and senior management engage 
proactively with industry bodies and have a transparent 
and open relationship with regulators.

Investment in expertise, systems and training to ensure 
robust compliance culture maintained across the business.

Record successfully implemented the new Senior Managers 
and Certification Regime (“SMCR”) during the year.

Key to strategy link
1  Quality client experience 

2  Technology and innovation

3  Talent development

42

Record plc Annual Report 2020

Risk management continued

Operational risk

Operational risks are broad in nature and inherent in all activities and processes performed across the business, and all other businesses.

They include the risk that operational flaws result in business losses – through error or fraud, the inability to capitalise on market 
opportunities, or weaknesses in systems and controls.

Risk

Link to 
strategy

Rating

Change

Mitigating activities and update

High

Low

1

2

1

2

Technology and information 
security risk – cyber security 
presents an ongoing significant 
risk to financial services 
companies, including the risk of 
failure of the Group’s technology 
and support systems, or 
penetration of such systems by 
third parties.

Potential impact – consequential 
loss of data, or the significant 
disruption to, or prevention of, 
the Group’s ability to operate, 
which could cause negative 
financial and reputational 
consequences.

Operational control 
environment – the risk of errors 
in execution and process 
management, legal, dealing, 
portfolio implementation, 
settlement, managing bespoke 
requirements and reporting and 
the risk of non‑compliance 
including monitoring of 
investment breaches.

Potential impact – such errors or 
non‑compliance could potentially 
lead to negative financial and 
reputational consequences.

Comprehensive disaster recovery (“DR”) and business 
contingency plans are in place and tested on a regular basis.

Information technology policies and technical standards 
are deployed across the Group, including induction and 
regular security awareness training.

Record continues to monitor, review and challenge its 
cyber and data security processes and their development, 
including input from the internal auditor and third party 
advisers. 

Cyber‑related metrics are monitored, reported and 
reviewed in monthly management information and Board 
information packs.

Covid‑19 has impacted the risks associated with our 
technology and information security systems. This reflects 
the well‑publicised perceived increase in risk from potential 
external third party “bad actors” and also the required 
reallocation of IT resource from prescheduled projects to 
ensure continuity of service and operations with employees 
working from home.

Dedicated and experienced portfolio management team 
oversees the investment process.

Dedicated and independent Front Office Risk Management 
team provides pre and post‑trade compliance assurances.

Compliance and Risk department oversees adherence to 
formal and established procedures via a structured 
monitoring programme, reporting directly to the Risk 
Management Committee. 

Automated post‑trade compliance tests monitor whether 
programmes are running in line with expectations and 
allow timely resolution. 

Internal audit function reports independently to the Audit 
and Risk Committee, reviewing higher‑risk operational 
areas.

Annual ISAE 3402 and AT‑C 320 service auditor’s report on 
internal controls independently reviewed and tested by 
RSM.

The Group has maintained the high standards around its 
operational control environment notwithstanding the effects 
of covid‑19 and the consequent requirement for full remote 
working.

Key to strategy link
1  Quality client experience 

Record plc Annual Report 2020

2  Technology and innovation

3  Talent development

43

Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional informationRisk management continued

Investment risk

The risk that long‑term investment performance is not delivered, damaging prospects for winning and retaining clients, and putting 
management fee rates under pressure.

Risk

Link to 
strategy

Rating

Change

Mitigating activities and update

High

Medium

1

2

3

1

2

Product underperformance 
– the risk that long‑term 
investment performance is not 
delivered.

Potential impact – damages 
prospects for winning and 
retaining clients, minimises 
revenues through reduced 
management and performance 
fees and may cause reputational 
damage.

Market liquidity risk – the risk 
of reduced or constrained market 
liquidity, which would affect 
Record’s investment process as 
it relies on trading a high turnover 
of client positions in both size 
and volume.

Potential impact – a reduction 
in market liquidity or the 
non‑functioning of financial 
markets could affect Record’s 
ability to meet its contractual 
obligations to clients, resulting in 
outflows and reductions to 
revenue.

Experienced Investment Committee meets regularly, 
ensuring consistent core investment processes are applied.

Dedicated currency management research and investment 
focus.

Diversification, both through offering multiple strategies that 
benefit from opposing market conditions i.e. “risk‑on” and 
“risk‑off”, and through a client base which is diverse in 
geography and base currency. 

Remuneration policy links senior management’s 
remuneration to long‑term performance of the Group.

As the Group widens its return‑seeking product range, it 
becomes more susceptible to the risk of client investment 
disappointment. The effect on markets caused by covid‑19 
has led to underperformance of Record’s Multi‑Strategy 
product. However, the new Dynamic Macro Currency 
strategy performed well in the final quarter.

The Group has a large panel of banking counterparties it 
uses to trade on behalf of clients in currency and related 
instruments.

Currency is a particularly deep and liquid market that has 
continued to provide sufficient daily liquidity, despite 
disruptive market “shock” events such as the result of the 
EU referendum in June 2016 and more recently the impact 
of covid‑19.

The Group has successfully navigated clients through a 
period of extreme market volatility arising from covid‑19, 
managing to secure sufficient liquidity in particularly 
challenging markets.

Key to strategy link
1  Quality client experience 

2  Technology and innovation

3  Talent development

44

Record plc Annual Report 2020

Risk management continued

Viability statement
In accordance with the UK Corporate Governance Code, the 
Directors have performed a robust assessment of the viability of 
the Group considering the business model, the Group’s expected 
financial position, Board strategy and risk appetite, the Group’s 
solvency and liquidity and its principal risks. Based on this 
assessment, the Directors have a current and reasonable 
expectation that the Group will continue to operate and meet 
its liabilities as they fall due up to 31 March 2023.

The Directors review the financial forecasts and position of the 
Group on an ongoing basis. The capital and dividend policy reflects 
the stated objectives of maintaining a strong balance sheet whilst 
allowing the Group the flexibility to adapt its products and services 
to market conditions, or to take advantage of emerging business 
opportunities. The Group’s strategy and principal risks are 
assessed and reviewed regularly by the Board, as well as by the 
Executive Committee and operational sub‑committees within the 
Group. Further detail on the Group’s strategy and principal risks is 
given in the Strategic report on pages 22 to 25 and 41 to 44 
respectively.

In assessing the viability of the Group, the Directors have 
considered the principal risks affecting the Group, which underpin 
the basis for the stress testing of the business plan conducted as 
part of the Group’s Internal Capital Adequacy Assessment Process 
(“ICAAP”). The ICAAP uses severe but plausible stress scenarios 
assuming the crystallising of a number of these principal risks to 
assess the options for mitigating the impact on the Group, and for 
ensuring that the ongoing viability of the Group is sustained. Such 
scenarios include items that may have a severe effect on the 
revenue generation capability and resulting profitability of the 
Group, for example:

•  market downturn – resulting in AUME decreasing, either through 
outflows and/or a reduction in value due to the link to other 
financial markets; 

•  operational risk event – causing AUME outflows and potentially 

reputational damage; and

•  the loss of key personnel – resulting in the loss of AUME or the 

inability to win new clients.

The scenarios assume mitigating actions including the potential for 
non‑critical cost reductions and reassessing the dividend policy, 
although any mitigating actions would need to be reassessed 
depending on the specific circumstances and expected duration of 
the factors affecting the business model at the time. The possibility 
that the impact and timing of factors potentially affecting the 
viability of the Group could be more severe than assumed plausible 
for the above testing should also be noted.

As discussed in more detail on page 40, the Group has responded 
well to the challenges raised by the impact of the covid‑19 
pandemic, maintaining both continuity in operational and client 
servicing matters and remaining independent without the need 
for additional funding or the use of related Government schemes.

However, the market downturn scenario has been the subject of 
further focus and revision as a result the impact on financial 
markets of covid‑19, and the corresponding decrease of 7% in the 
Group’s AUME for the quarter ending 31 March 2020. The updated 
scenario assumed an immediate 30% reduction in AUME due to 
market movements with stagnant recovery over the viability 
assessment period, and with management actions limited only 
to the cessation of dividend payments. Notwithstanding such a 
severe and immediate decrease in AUME and hence revenues, 
the Group remained viable, retaining a strong capital position 
significantly in excess of its regulatory requirement supported 
by significant liquid resources.

Market disruption, changes to regulation and heightened economic 
uncertainty in light of covid‑19 will continue to provide challenges 
to the Group and the environment in which it operates. Through its 
change in strategy and increased focus on growth combined with 
the continued enhancement of its products and services and in 
maintaining its approach to innovation and the use of technology, 
the Directors believe the Company to be capable of meeting such 
challenges. However, the Directors consider a three‑year horizon 
over which to assess the viability of the Group to be appropriate 
under such circumstances, since any further planning horizon 
provides a greater level of uncertainty to financial projections.

Upon review of the results of the stress testing, the Directors 
concluded that the Group would have sufficient capital and liquid 
resources to withstand the stressed scenarios and ensure its 
ongoing viability, based on current information and the three‑year 
viability horizon.

Record plc Annual Report 2020

45

Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional informationCorporate social responsibility

We believe that all stakeholders are beneficiaries 
of environmentally friendly business practice and 
socially responsible investment.

In conducting its business operations, the Group has 
a responsibility to its stakeholders and the environment. 
Our stakeholders, with whom we maintain an ongoing dialogue, 
are detailed on page 12. We believe that all stakeholders are 
beneficiaries of environmentally friendly business practice 
and socially responsible investment.

Our approach to corporate social responsibility has historically 
been built around three key areas i.e. Community, Workplace 
and Environment. More recently, we have introduced certain 
environmental, social and governance (“ESG”) factors into some 
of our currency management products, putting Record among 
the first currency managers to develop a return‑seeking strategy 
incorporating ESG factors into currency and to be accepted as 
a signatory to the Principles for Responsible Investment (“PRI”) 
(as announced in June 2018). Record has complied with the 
PRI requirements of annual reporting, and attended the annual 
conference in London. We are public supporters of the Task Force 
on Climate‑related Financial Disclosures (“TCFD”), and are looking 
into implementing its recommendations on disclosure of climate 
risk exposure, and promoting this transparency across the industry. 
We have therefore added “Responsible Investment” to our existing 
key areas of CSR focus.

Record is a certified CarbonNeutral® company according to The 
CarbonNeutral Protocol.

Responsible investment
As part of our drive to incorporate ESG factors into active currency 
products, Record has worked in collaboration with Oxford‑based 
researchers to extend the boundaries of ESG beyond its existing 
base in equities and bonds, to encompass the currency markets.

Our ESG‑tilt product applies insights on the relationship between 
productivity and exchange rates to a database of country‑specific 
ESG data. The result is a range of currency‑relevant ESG factors 
related to the United Nations Sustainable Development Goals. 
These factors (for example: education, child mortality, improved 
water sources and enforcement of legal contracts) are used to 
construct an ESG metric which tilts the Multi‑Strategy currency 
portfolio in a pro‑ESG manner. Record has seeded this strategy 
and hopes to offer it to clients in due course.

Our experience of existing investment strategies takes into account 
the links between currency returns and productivity gains, so we 
have focused on those ESG factors most clearly related to 
economic productivity. As ESG and productivity have a closer 
relationship in Emerging Markets than Developed Markets, our first 
ESG process has been designed to tilt the EM currency strand of 
the Multi‑Strategy product.

In 2019 Record began research into its first “Impact” strategy, 
and used its own cash for investing into Impact Bonds, organised 
through international and regional multilateral organisations which 
are signatories of the UN Sustainable Development Goals 
(“SDGs”). The funds borrowed in global financial markets are 
allocated to projects to support and promote economic, social and 
environmental development in low and middle‑income countries.

Record believes that this will be a good use of cash to aid 
development and achieve impact, as well as an opportunity to gain 
experience in dealing, holding and reporting on Impact Bonds in 
order to achieve a competitive and trusted understanding which 
will underscore future Impact Bond‑related products.

Record acknowledges the diversity of approaches, determined by 
varying preferences and priorities as well as underlying constraints, 
taken by its clients to incorporate ESG into their investment. 
Therefore Record is actively exploring ways to collaborate with 
external parties including clients who might wish to apply the 
methodology to reflect their own specific ESG views, and with 
research institutes. Record’s research is ongoing, responding 
to improvements in available data, as well as developing 
and improving on its own strategies and building and innovating 
new approaches to maintain its place at the forefront of research 
in such a fast‑developing space.

Record became a sponsor for the Centre for the Study of 
Financial Innovation and is a member of Swiss Sustainable 
Finance. Our research team have also collaborated with 
Princeton Professor Peter Singer AC on ethical investment.

46

Record plc Annual Report 2020

Corporate social responsibility

About  
us

Business 
model

Markets

Strategic 
priorities  
and goals

Key 
performance 
indicators

Operating 
review

Finance  
and risk

Corporate 
social 
responsibility

Workplace
Record’s working environment is designed to encourage bright, 
dynamic and committed individuals to thrive. We believe that 
investing in our staff and developing their potential is key to the 
success of the business and our policies and practices reflect this.

The Group’s offices have been designed to allow all departments 
to work together in an open plan environment. The open plan office 
allows ease of communication between departments, as well as 
enabling staff to work closely with senior management. Detail on 
how the Group has successfully managed the transition to remote 
working during the covid‑19 pandemic is provided on page 40.

The office environments and culture promote staff development 
and training. All staff are invited to participate in monthly company 
update meetings which are led by the Chief Executive Officer. 
The Group also provides study support to employees who wish 
to pursue relevant professional qualifications. The Board has 
established a staff‑run welfare committee which organises 
team‑building and other social events, enhancing interaction 
between different departments within the business. An ESG 
committee was created in 2020 to discuss firm‑level ESG projects 
and improvements, as well as to engage with wider ESG issues, 
events and industry developments.

In addition, the Group continues to provide a number of other 
benefits to employees including pension, private medical cover, 
life insurance, permanent health insurance, maternity and shared 
parental benefits, lunchtime fitness classes and subsidised gym 
membership. All employees participate in the Group Profit Share 
Scheme and have the opportunity to acquire shares in Record plc 
through this scheme, as well as through the Record plc Share 
Incentive Plan. All employees are also offered the Employee 
Assistance Programme, which provides 24/7 confidential 
telephone support from qualified counsellors as well as online 
computerised cognitive behavioural therapy, to support anyone 
struggling with their mental health. Confidence and resilience 
training was also offered to employees during the year and was 
well attended.

The Group has an established internship programme for students 
and during the year welcomed interns from the University of 
Cambridge, Oxford University, the University of Birmingham and 
the University of Luxembourg.

Staff retention (%)

FY-20

FY-19

FY-18

81%

84%

93%

Record plc Annual Report 2020

47

Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional informationCorporate social responsibility continued

Community
Record recognises its obligations and responsibility to contribute 
to the wider community outside of the firm. Over the course of the 
year, the Group made charitable donations totalling £15,242. 
Our charitable giving is focused on employee choice, with the 
Group matching employee donations and sponsorship. The Group 
continues to encourage employees to participate in fundraising 
activities for charitable causes and this year employees participated 
in a variety of events, including charity lunches and fundraising 
competitions. Staff donated and sent pictures in for World Health 
Day, created a collage and raised £2,000 to support NHS 
Charities. Other charity events included a Great British Bake Off 
for Stand Up To Cancer, Jeans for Genes, a Children in Need 
breakfast and fundraising for a 3 Peaks Challenge in aid of 
Children4Children. A scheme allowing UK employees to give 
to charity through the payroll is also offered.

Charitable donations (£’000)

FY-20

FY-19

FY-18

15.2

16.8

13.7

We also provide financial assistance to students studying at Balliol 
College, Oxford through a bursary scheme, which provides grants 
to students who aim to pursue ambitions which will benefit the 
wider community, for example in medical or charitable fields.

Human rights
Record complies fully with appropriate human rights legislation in 
the countries in which it operates.

Equal opportunities and diversity
The Group’s aims include ensuring that all staff are provided with 
equal opportunities and that the workplace is free of discrimination. 
It also aims to ensure that all recruitment processes are fair and are 
carried out objectively, systematically and in line with the 
requirements of employment law.

The Group ensures that all staff are aware that it is not acceptable 
to discriminate, harass or victimise anyone, and also that it is 
unlawful and that such behaviour will not be tolerated under any 
circumstance.

The Group believes that valuing what is unique about individuals 
and drawing on their different perspectives and experience will add 
value to the way the Group does business. By accessing, recruiting 
and developing talent from a diverse pool of candidates, the Group 
can gain an insight into different markets and better support client 
needs. The Group aims to create a productive environment, 
representative of different cultures and groups, where everyone 
has an equal chance to succeed.

Record celebrated the appointment of its first female CEO in 
February 2020, Leslie Hill. A working group has been created to 
begin the process of creating a Women’s Network, in order to 
promote the talented individuals who identify as a woman, and 
support progress in both the firm and across the industry towards 
gender equality.

The gender diversity within the Group is shown below:

Gender balance 
As at 31 March 2020 

Board Directors 

Senior management 

Other staff 

All employees 

Female 

Male

3 

6 

24 

33 

43% 

26% 

45% 

40% 

4 

17 

29 

50 

57%

74%

55%

60%

48

Record plc Annual Report 2020

Corporate social responsibility continued

Environment
The Group seeks to minimise its carbon footprint through 
recognising the environmental impact of its activities, reducing that 
impact through responsible procurement of goods and services, 
and offsetting its remaining carbon emissions. The Group first 
assessed its carbon footprint in July 2006, and has offset its 
carbon emissions since then through investment in renewable 
energy projects, currently in Kenya.

The Group’s annual emissions1 (before offset) have been calculated 
using the WRI/WBCSD Greenhouse Gas Protocol. Scope 2 
emissions principally relate to electricity and heat and Scope 3 
emissions principally relate to travel. Scope 3 emissions accounted 
for 85% of emissions (2019: 87%).

Gross CO2 emissions (Tonnes)

FY-20

42

FY-19

47

FY-18

58

231

316

348

Scope 2

Scope 3

Gross CO2 emissions by activity (Tonnes)

FY-20

FY-19

FY-18

118

123

120

104

51

184

218

54

68

Commuting

Business 
travel

Other

The Strategic report is set out on pages 1 to 49 of the 
Annual Report and outlines our strategic objectives, 
performance and financial position, as well as our 
outlook for the future.

The Strategic report was approved by the Board 
on 18 June 2020 and signed on its behalf by: 

Gross CO2 emissions per head (Tonnes)

FY-20

FY-19

FY-18

3.1

4.4

5.3

Leslie Hill
Chief Executive Officer

1.  Group emissions data relates to the calendar year preceding the given 

financial year end.

Record plc Annual Report 2020

49

Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional informationIn this section

Chairman’s introduction 

Board of Directors 

Corporate governance report 

Corporate governance overview 

Board structure 

Board activity 

Board effectiveness 

Corporate governance framework 

Internal control and risk management  

Nomination Committee report 

Audit and Risk Committee report 

Remuneration report 

Chair of the Remuneration Committee’s statement  

Remuneration policy 

Annual report on remuneration  

Directors’ report 

Directors’ responsibilities statement 

51

52

54

54

56

58

59

60

61

62

64

70

70

72

77

86

89

50

Record plc Annual Report 2020

GovernanceChairman’s introduction

I am pleased to confirm that the Board and its Committees have 
continued to work closely with the Group’s highly experienced 
management team to maintain its strong governance framework 
which effectively supports Record’s operational teams in delivering 
a high-quality range of products and services. 

I am confident that the Group’s governance arrangements are both 
appropriate and effective and that going forward the Group will 
continue to embrace regulatory, governance and best practice 
changes in its drive to best serve all its stakeholders. The 
appointment of Leslie Hill as CEO has brought a refreshed 
perspective to business strategy and oversight which I am sure will 
also lead to enhancements of the Group’s corporate governance 
processes over the coming months and I look forward to seeing 
these developments.

The Group’s strong and robust corporate governance framework 
has allowed the Group to continue to effectively maintain its 
governance and oversight practices during the covid-19 pandemic 
and I wish to acknowledge and praise all the Committees and the 
management team for their focus and contributions during this 
crisis.

Neil Record
Chairman

18 June 2020

In this section of the Annual Report 
we set out our extensive corporate 
governance arrangements and 
describe the operation of the Board 
and its Committees during the year.

Neil Record
Chairman

Company purpose
To deliver innovative, thought leading and practical solutions to the 
needs of currency market users and investors, while maintaining 
independence and integrity.

Corporate culture
Since the business was first established in 1983, Record has 
endeavoured to put the interests and needs of our clients first and 
this cultural belief is encouraged and deeply embedded within all 
business functions. The Board has worked hard to ensure that the 
importance of client focus through diligence, transparency, 
accountability and probity has been disseminated to all staff, 
contractors and consultants across the Group.

Corporate governance framework
The Board has established a framework of committees and 
sub-committees to ensure robust corporate governance practices 
throughout the business. The Board is confident that this structure 
is appropriate and that the delegation of responsibilities allows the 
business to operate in a structured manner and to respond rapidly 
when issues arise.

Further information on the corporate governance framework is 
provided on pages 60 to 61.

Compliance with the UK Corporate Governance Code
This is the first year Record has been required to adopt and report 
on the 2018 UK Corporate Governance Code (“Code”). We fully 
support the introduction of the revised code and we have complied 
with the new provisions as deemed appropriate to Record. Pages 
54 and 55 provide an overview of how the Code has been applied 
and Record’s departures from the Code are fully explained.

Section 172 disclosure
Section 172 of the Companies Act 2006 requires directors to 
promote the success of the company for the benefit of the 
members as a whole and in doing so to have regard to the 
interests of stakeholders including clients, employees, suppliers, 
regulators and the wider society in which it operates. Details of 
how the Board engaged with Record’s various stakeholders are 
shown on pages 12 and 13. 

Record plc Annual Report 2020

51

Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional informationBoard of Directors

The Board is a highly skilled and committed group of 
individuals who are focused on understanding Record’s 
strengths and the challenges the Group faces.

N

Neil Record
Chairman

Leslie Hill
Chief Executive Officer

Steve Cullen
Chief Financial Officer

Bob Noyen
Chief Investment Officer

Appointed: Neil founded 
Record in 1983 and has been its 
principal shareholder and 
Chairman since then. Neil also 
served as Record’s CEO until 
October 2010.

Previous appointments: Prior 
to founding Record Neil was an 
economist at the Bank of 
England and worked in the 
commodity and currency trading 
department at Mars Inc’s UK 
subsidiary.

Current external appointments: 
Neil is Chairman of the Board of 
The Institute of Economic Affairs 
and a director of IEA Forum 
Limited, Chairman of The Global 
Warming Policy Forum and a 
director of Aims of Industry 
Limited, Oxford Festival of the 
Arts and Circular Wave Limited.

Skills and experience: As 
founder of the business Neil 
remains integral to the 
development of Record’s 
products and the direction of 
business strategy. As Chairman 
he is a strong figurehead, 
well-known and well-respected 
within the field of currency 
management and as such is an 
asset to the Board.

Neil is the author of numerous 
books and articles on currency 
and other risk management 
topics and is a frequent speaker 
at industry conferences and 
seminars worldwide.

Appointed: Leslie joined Record 
in 1992. She was appointed 
Head of Sales and Marketing in 
1999 and Chief Executive Officer 
in February 2020.

Previous appointments: 
Leslie’s extensive prior 
experience includes working at 
Lloyds Bank and Merrill Lynch 
where she was Director and 
Head of Corporate Foreign 
Exchange Sales worldwide.

Current external appointments: 
Leslie is a director of Trade 
Record Ltd, a company in which 
Record has a 40% investment.

Skills and experience: Having 
worked at Record for 28 years 
Leslie has a deep understanding 
of Record’s products and the 
needs of clients. As Head of the 
Client Team she was 
instrumental in driving the 
client-focused culture of the 
business and helped to maintain 
existing and develop new client 
relationships. Leslie is therefore 
very well placed to provide a 
client perspective during Board 
discussions. 

This extensive experience 
means Leslie as CEO is ideally 
suited to leading Record in the 
current client led changing 
environment and to ensuring 
that it thrives within it.

Appointed: Steve was 
appointed to the Board and 
made Chief Financial Officer in 
March 2013.

Previous appointments: Steve 
qualified as a Chartered 
Accountant in 1994 and gained 
15 years of audit experience 
within public practice.

Current external appointments: 
Steve has no other 
appointments outside of the 
Record Group.

Skills and experience: Steve 
joined Record in October 2003 
and led Record’s Finance team 
for over nine years reporting 
directly to the Chief Financial 
Officer. He was part of the 
internal management team 
at Record involved in the 
preparation for admission to 
trading on the London Stock 
Exchange in December 2007.

With his FCA qualification and 
over 30 years’ experience, 
including over 16 years within 
financial services, Steve brings 
considerable accounting, 
financial and risk management 
expertise to the Board.

Appointed: Bob has been Chief 
Investment Officer since 2000.

Previous appointments: Bob 
previously worked as Assistant 
Treasurer for Minorco (part of 
Anglo American plc).

Current external appointments: 
Bob has no other appointments 
outside of the Record Group.

Skills and experience: Bob 
joined Record in 1999 with 
responsibility for Investment and 
Research. He chairs Record’s 
Investment Committee and the 
Investment Management Group. 

Bob has extensive knowledge of 
currency and other markets and 
he plays a key role in the 
development of Record’s 
products, ensuring products 
evolve to meet the 
ever-changing needs of clients. 
Bob therefore brings a product 
focus to Board deliberations. 
He is also closely involved in 
some of Record’s most 
significant client relationships.

52

Record plc Annual Report 2020

Board of Directors

A
N *

R

*

A

N

R

A

N
R *

A  

 Audit and Risk 
Committee

N  

 Nomination  
Committee

 Remuneration 
Committee

Chair

R  
* 

Gender diversity
As at year end and as at the  
date of report

Male 

57%

Female 

43%

Board tenure
As at year end

< 3 yrs 
14%

3-6 yrs 
29%

> 6 yrs 
57%

James Wood-Collins served as 
Chief Executive Officer from 
October 2010 until he resigned 
from the position in February 
2020. His biographical details 
were provided in previous 
Annual Reports. 

Jane Tufnell
Senior Independent Director

Rosemary Hilary
Non-executive Director

Tim Edwards
Non-executive Director

Appointed: Tim was appointed 
as a Non-executive Director of 
Record in March 2018.

Previous appointments: 
Previously, Tim was a member 
of the governing Board of 
InnovateUK, the UK’s innovation 
agency, a director of the UK Cell 
and Gene Therapy Catapult and 
Chair of the UK BioIndustry 
Association.

Current external appointments: 
Tim is a biotech entrepreneur, 
who is currently chair of Karus 
Therapeutics Limited and Storm 
Therapeutics Limited, and a 
director of AstronauTX Limited.

Skills and experience: Tim is a 
Chartered Accountant with a 
background in corporate finance 
and venture investing, and he 
has extensive corporate 
development and people 
management experience. 
Tim adds insight to Board 
discussions ensuring that the 
Board continues to focus on mid 
to long-term value development.

Appointed: Jane was appointed 
as a Non-executive Director in 
September 2015 and became 
the Senior Independent Director 
in October 2018.

Previous appointments: Jane 
co-founded the investment 
management firm Ruffer in 
1994, and served on its 
management board until her 
retirement in June 2014. 

Current external appointments: 
Jane is the chair of Odyssean 
Investment Trust plc and is an 
independent non-executive 
director of Schroder UK Public 
Private Trust plc and ICG 
Enterprise Trust plc.

Skills and experience: Jane 
has a wealth of investment 
management expertise and her 
experience as a non-executive 
director on other boards means 
she is well placed to bring 
valuable market experience and 
good business insight to the 
Board in order to drive the 
business forward. Jane’s 
experience on other boards also 
positions her well to serve as 
Senior Independent Director.

Appointed: Rosemary was 
appointed as a Non-executive 
Director in June 2016. 

Previous appointments: 
Rosemary was previously Chief 
Audit Officer of TSB Bank, and 
has held senior regulatory roles 
within the Bank of England, the 
FSA and then the FCA. 
Rosemary was formerly a 
member of the Investment 
Committee and Chair of the Risk 
and Audit Committee of the 
Pension Protection Fund (2016 
to 2019) and Trustee and 
member of the Audit, Risk and 
Finance Committee of Shelter, 
the homelessness charity.

Current external appointments: 
Rosemary is a non-executive 
director of Willis Limited, 
St. James’s Place plc, Vitality 
Life and Vitality Health. She is 
also a member of the MBA 
Advisory Board at Cass 
Business School. 

Skills and experience: 
Rosemary is a qualified 
accountant with expertise 
in governance, business risk 
and control, and has strong 
knowledge of the asset 
management, insurance and 
banking sectors. Rosemary 
provides support and challenge 
to Record’s management, and in 
doing so helps the Board 
maintain its strong governance 
framework.

Record plc Annual Report 2020

53

 Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional informationCorporate governance report

Corporate governance overview
Compliance with the UK Corporate 
Governance Code (the ”Code”)
The Board is supportive of the principles of 
the Code and has been since its Admission 
to the Official List of the UK Listing 
Authority in December 2007, with the 
Board complying as it deems appropriate 
given the nature and size of the business. 

The latest version of the Code was 
published in July 2018 and is applicable 
to accounting periods beginning on or after 
1 January 2019. 

Copies of the Code can be obtained from 
the FRC’s website at www.frc.org.uk. 

Listed companies are required under the 
Financial Conduct Authority Listing Rules 
either to comply with the provisions of the 
Code or explain to investors in their next 
annual report why they have not done so.

The Code consists of the 18 principles set 
out in this table; each is cross-referenced 
to the relevant section of this Annual 
Report. 

Section 1:  
Board Leadership & Company Purpose

Section 2:  
Division of Responsibilities

A. A successful company is led by an 
effective and entrepreneurial board, whose 
role is to promote the long-term sustainable 
success of the company, generating value 
for shareholders and contributing to wider 
society.

Board of Directors, pages 52 and 53 
Board structure, page 56 
Our stakeholders, pages 12 and 13

B. The board should establish the 
company’s purpose, values and strategy, 
and satisfy itself that these and its culture 
are aligned. All directors must act with 
integrity, lead by example and promote the 
desired culture.

Strategic priorities and goals, pages 22 to 25

C. The board should ensure that the 
necessary resources are in place for the 
company to meet its objectives and 
measure performance against them. 
The board should also establish a 
framework of prudent and effective 
controls, which enable risk to be 
assessed and managed.

Key performance indicators, pages 26 to 29 
Risk management, pages 38 to 45 
Governance framework, pages 60 and 61 
Audit and Risk Committee report, pages 64 
to 69

D. In order for the company to meet 
its responsibilities to shareholders and 
stakeholders, the board should ensure 
effective engagement with, and encourage 
participation from, these parties.

Our stakeholders, pages 12 and 13

E. The board should ensure that workforce 
policies and practices are consistent with 
the company’s values and support its 
long-term sustainable success. The 
workforce should be able to raise any 
matters of concern.

Our stakeholders, pages 12 and 13 
Corporate Social Responsibility statement, 
pages 46 to 49 

F. The chair leads the board and is 
responsible for its overall effectiveness 
in directing the company. They should 
demonstrate objective judgement 
throughout their tenure and promote a 
culture of openness and debate. In addition, 
the chair facilitates constructive board 
relations and the effective contribution of all 
non-executive directors, and ensures that 
directors receive accurate, timely and clear 
information.

Board structure, page 56 
Board activity, pages 58 and 59

G. The board should include an appropriate 
combination of executive and non-executive 
(and, in particular, independent 
non-executive) directors, such that no 
one individual or small group of individuals 
dominates the board’s decision-making. 
There should be a clear division of 
responsibilities between the leadership of 
the board and the executive leadership of 
the company’s business.

Board structure, page 56 
Nomination Committee report, pages 62 
and 63

H. Non-executive directors should 
have sufficient time to meet their board 
responsibilities. They should provide 
constructive challenge, strategic guidance, 
offer specialist advice and hold 
management to account.

Board structure, page 56 
Nomination Committee report, pages 62 
and 63

I. The board, supported by the company 
secretary, should ensure that it has the 
policies, processes, information, time and 
resources it needs in order to function 
effectively and efficiently.

Board structure, page 56 
Board activity, pages 58 and 59 
Governance framework, pages 60 and 61

54

Record plc Annual Report 2020

Corporate governance report

Section 3:  
Composition, Succession & Evaluation

Section 4:  
Audit, Risk & Internal Control

Section 5:  
Remuneration

J. Appointments to the board should be 
subject to a formal, rigorous and 
transparent procedure, and an effective 
succession plan should be maintained for 
board and senior management. Both 
appointments and succession plans should 
be based on merit and objective criteria 
and, within this context, should promote 
diversity of gender, social and ethnic 
backgrounds, cognitive and personal 
strengths.

Nomination Committee report, pages 62 
and 63

K. The board and its committees should 
have a combination of skills, experience and 
knowledge. Consideration should be given 
to the length of service of the board as a 
whole and membership regularly refreshed.

Nomination Committee report, pages 62 
and 63

L. Annual evaluation of the board should 
consider its composition, diversity and how 
effectively members work together to 
achieve objectives. Individual evaluation 
should demonstrate whether each director 
continues to contribute effectively.

Board effectiveness, page 59 
Nomination Committee report, pages 62 
and 63

The Board has reviewed the 
appropriateness of the provisions to 
determine whether they should be applied 
or if departure is justified. All provisions of 
the Code have been applied as necessary 
as part of Record’s corporate governance 
framework except for the following:

•  Provision 9 of the Code recommends 
that the chair should be independent 
on appointment. Neil Record is deemed 
to be a controlling shareholder and so 
was not independent on appointment. 
However, the Board is of the opinion 
that the potential issue of 
non-independence is outweighed 
by the attributes of leadership and 
guidance that Neil brings to the role.

M. The board should establish formal and 
transparent policies and procedures to 
ensure the independence and effectiveness 
of internal and external audit functions and 
satisfy itself on the integrity of financial and 
narrative statements. 

Audit and Risk Committee report, pages 64 
to 69 
Directors’ report, pages 86 to 88 
Financial review, pages 34 to 37 
Risk management, pages 38 to 45

N. The board should present a fair, 
balanced and understandable assessment 
of the company’s position and prospects.

Audit and Risk Committee report, pages 64 
to 69

O. The board should establish procedures 
to manage risk, oversee the internal control 
framework, and determine the nature and 
extent of the principal risks that the 
company is willing to take in order to 
achieve its long-term strategic objectives.

Audit and Risk Committee report, pages 64 
to 69 
Risk management, pages 38 to 45

P. Remuneration policies and practices 
should be designed to support strategy 
and promote long-term sustainable 
success. Executive remuneration should 
be aligned to company purpose and values, 
and be clearly linked to the successful 
delivery of the company’s long-term 
strategy.

Remuneration report, pages 70 to 85

Q. A formal and transparent procedure for 
developing policy on executive 
remuneration and determining director and 
senior management remuneration should 
be established. No director should be 
involved in deciding their own remuneration 
outcome. 

Remuneration report, pages 70 to 85

R. Directors should exercise independent 
judgement and discretion when authorising 
remuneration outcomes, taking account of 
company and individual performance, and 
wider circumstances.

Remuneration report, pages 70 to 85

•  Provision 19 of the Code recommends 
that the chair should not remain in post 
beyond nine years from the date of first 
appointment to the board. Neil Record 
founded the Record Group in 1983 and 
led the business until its IPO in 
December 2007. At the time of the IPO 
it was agreed Neil was best placed to 
continue to chair the business, a role 
he has undertaken ever since.

Neil is well-known and well respected 
within the field of currency management 
and his long established involvement 
with the business, his ideas and 
character have built the business to 
what it is today. The Board is of the 
opinion that Neil continues to add 
considerable value and that retaining 
him as Chairman is therefore justified 
for the foreseeable future. Details of the 
Nomination Committee’s review of the 
tenure of the Chairman conducted in 
2020 together with its conclusion are 
provided on page 63.

•  Provision 21 of the Code recommends 
that the chair should consider having a 
regular externally facilitated board 
evaluation. In FTSE 350 companies 
this should happen at least every three 
years. As a non-FTSE 350 company the 
triennial requirement for an external 
assessment does not apply to Record 
plc and to date has not been considered 
necessary. Details of the evaluation 
process conducted in 2020 are provided 
on page 63.

•  Provision 38 of the Code recommends 
that the pension contribution rates for 
executive directors, or payments in lieu, 
should be aligned with those available to 
the workforce. Historically, the pension 
contribution rates for Executive Directors 
have been higher than the rest of the 
workforce; this discrepancy is now 
being addressed. Details of how pension 
contributions rates are being aligned 
across the business are provided in 
the Remuneration report on page 73.

Record plc Annual Report 2020

55

 Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional informationCorporate governance report continued

Board structure
Board composition
The Board consists of seven members and is headed by Neil Record 
(Chairman), with the Executive Directors, Leslie Hill (Chief Executive 
Officer), Steve Cullen (Chief Financial Officer) and Bob Noyen (Chief 
Investment Officer). There are currently three Non-executive 
Directors, Jane Tufnell, being the Senior Independent Director, 
Rosemary Hilary and Tim Edwards. The biographical details of 
the Board members are set out on pages 52 and 53. 

In February 2020 James Wood-Collins stepped down from the role 
of CEO and was replaced by Leslie Hill. Further information on this 
Board change is detailed in the Nomination Committee report on 
page 62. There have been no new external appointments to the 
Board during the year.

Code provision
The Code recommends that at least half the board, excluding 
the chair, should be non-executive directors whom the board 
considers to be independent. Prior to the restructure undertaken 
in February 2020 the Board composition had remained unchanged 
for a number of years with four Executive Directors and three 
independent Non-executive Directors and this was considered 
to be appropriate for the business at that time.

Following the re-structure in early 2020, the Board now consists 
of three Executive Directors and three independent Non-executive 
Directors meaning that Record now complies with this provision. 
The Board considers that the current composition is appropriate 
given the size and structure of the business.

The division of responsibilities between the Chairman and the 
Chief Executive Officer is clearly established, set out in writing 
and agreed by the Board.

Board responsibilities
The Board has a schedule of 
matters specifically reserved for 
its decision and approval, which 
includes but is not limited to:

Chairman
The Chairman is responsible for leadership of the Board. He is also responsible for overseeing the activities 
of the Chief Executive Officer and providing advice, guidance and support to the executive team. He works 
with the Board to develop Group strategy and support its implementation. The Chairman is a principal 
ambassador of Record and a guardian of the Group’s ethos and values.

•  determining the Group’s 
long-term strategy and 
objectives;

•  authorising significant capital 

expenditure;

•  approving the Group’s annual 

and interim reports and 
preliminary announcements;

• 

the setting of interim and 
special dividends and 
recommendation of final 
dividend payments;

•  ensuring the effectiveness 

of internal controls;

• 

the authorisation of Directors’ 
conflicts or possible conflicts 
of interest; and

•  communication with 
shareholders and the 
stock market.

Chief Executive Officer
The Chief Executive Officer is responsible for the executive management of the Group to grow the business 
profitably while acting in the interests of all stakeholders – clients, shareholders, employees and industry 
regulators and upholding the core values of Record. Her statement on FY20 and the outlook for the Group 
can be found on pages 6 to 9.

Chief Financial Officer
The Chief Financial Officer is responsible for the finance function, the financial management and control 
of the business, and for developing and delivering appropriate internal and external financial reporting. 
His financial review for FY20 can be found on pages 34 to 37.

Chief Investment Officer
The Chief Investment Officer is responsible for all research and investment strategy activity and for the 
implementation of investment processes.

Senior Independent Director
The Senior Independent Director’s role is to act as a sounding board for the Chairman, oversee the evaluation of the Chairman’s performance 
(see page 63) and serve as an intermediary for the other Directors if necessary. She is also available as an additional point of contact for 
shareholders and other stakeholders should they wish to raise matters with her rather than the Chairman or the Chief Executive Officer.

Non-executive Directors
The Non-executive Directors are responsible for upholding high standards of integrity and probity; providing constructive challenge and helping to 
develop proposals on strategy.

56

Record plc Annual Report 2020

Corporate governance report continued

Independence of the Non-executive Directors
In determining the independence of Non-executive Directors, 
the Board has taken into consideration the guidance provided by 
the Code. The Board considers Jane Tufnell, Rosemary Hilary and 
Tim Edwards to be independent at the current time. Neil Record is 
a Non-executive Chairman, although he is not considered to be 
independent.

Director appointments and time commitment
The rules providing for the appointment, election, re-election and 
the removal of Directors are contained in the Company’s Articles of 
Association, these remain unchanged from the previous year and 
are made available for inspection by the Company’s shareholders 
at each AGM. The Company’s Articles of Association may be 
amended by special resolution of the shareholders.

Under the Company’s current Articles of Association, the minimum 
number of Directors is two and the maximum is twelve. Directors 
appointed by the Board must offer themselves for election at the 
next Annual General Meeting of the Company following their 
appointment but they are not taken into account in determining the 
Directors or the number of Directors who are to retire by rotation 
and stand for re-election at that meeting. The minimum number of 
Directors required to retire by rotation is one third.

Under the UK Corporate Governance Code July 2018, all directors 
should be subject to annual election by shareholders. The Board 
has reviewed the recommendation of the Code and the provisions 
in the Articles and has determined that annual re-election of all 
Directors is appropriate, and accordingly all seven Board Directors 
will stand for re-election at the 2020 AGM. The Board has also 
agreed that the Articles should be revised to align with the Code, 
current legislation and market practice and a special resolution 
regarding the amendment of the Articles will be put to shareholders 
at the 2020 AGM. 

The Board has agreed that all Directors standing for re-election 
continue to make a valuable contribution to the Board’s 
deliberations and recommends their re-election. As required by the 
UK Listing Rules, the appointment of independent directors must 
be approved by a simple majority of all shareholders and by a 
simple majority of the independent shareholders. Further details 
are set out in the 2020 Notice of AGM. 

Non-executive Directors’ letters of appointment stipulate that they 
are expected to commit sufficient time to discharge their duties. 
Non-executive Directors are required to notify the Chairman before 
taking on any additional appointments. Details of other roles held 
by the Non-executives are set out in their biographies on pages 
52 and 53. The Board is satisfied that all Directors continue to be 
effective and demonstrate commitment to their respective roles.

The Executive Directors are employed on a full-time basis and do not 
have any other significant commitments outside of the Record Group. 
Neil Record, as Non-executive Chairman, works on a part-time basis. 

For details of Executive Directors’ service contracts, termination 
arrangements and Non-executive Directors’ letters of appointment, 
please refer to the Remuneration report, page 84.

Board member diversity
The Board has approved a policy for ensuring Board member 
diversity and has delegated the responsibility for addressing Board 
diversity to the Nomination Committee. The Nomination Committee 
reviews Board composition in the context of diversity and reports 
its recommendations to the Board to ensure diversity is achieved. 

The Board acknowledges the importance of diversity in the 
boardroom in its broadest sense as a driver of board effectiveness. 
Diversity encompasses diversity of perspective, experience, 
background, psychological type and personal attributes. The 
Board recognises that gender diversity is a significant aspect of 
diversity and acknowledges the important role that women with the 
right skills and experience can play in contributing to diversity of 
perspective in the boardroom. The Group’s Board Diversity Policy 
sets out that the Board will endeavour to ensure that the minority 
gender on the Board represents at least one-third of the Board.

The Board currently has three female members in a board of seven 
and thus women make up 43% of the Board. The Board’s opinion 
is that the current composition of members comprises a good 
mixture of skills, experience, knowledge and backgrounds and is 
therefore appropriate for the business at the present time. Future 
Executive Director succession planning will take into account the 
benefits of diversity including gender diversity as set out in the 
Group’s Board Diversity Policy. Diversity in the workplace is 
described on page 48.

Record plc Annual Report 2020

57

 Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional informationCorporate governance report continued

Board activity
Board focus and decision-making
The regular scheduled Board meetings have a set strategically 
focused agenda and Board members are invited in advance of 
each meeting to add any additional issues they wish to be 
addressed. Material circulated in advance of the meetings includes:

Updates from the chairs of the Nomination Committee, 
Remuneration Committee and Audit and Risk Committee 
are provided at each meeting.

Ongoing matters discussed included Brexit planning, 
the implementation of SMCR, global regulatory 
developments and the covid-19 pandemic.

•  Minutes of the previous Board meetings

•  ExCom meeting minutes

•  CEO report

•  KPI data pack

• 

Investment performance report

• 

Investment Committee report 

•  Research activities report

•  Compliance and risk report

•  COO report

•  Head of HR report

•  Management information pack

During the year, the Board focused on the key matters 
detailed below:

March 2020

•  Group strategy and focus (Strategy)

•  Budget FY21 (Strategy, Finance)

•  Development of a Macro Fund 

strategy (Strategy) 

June 2019

•  Going concern and long-term viability 
review (Finance, Risk management))

•  Annual Report and Accounts 2019 
and dividend proposal (Finance)

•  Corporate objectives review (Strategy)

February 2020

•  Ratification of Impact Bonds 

proposal (Strategy)

•  Risk appetite statement and ICAAP 

document (Risk management)

•  Board structure and CEO change 

(Strategy, Governance)

Key matters 
considered by the 
Board in the year to 
31 March 2020

July 2019

• 

IT strategy and budget (Strategy, 
Finance, Risk)

•  Code of Ethics Part I (Conduct)

•  Conflicts of interest policy (Conduct)

•  Pillar 3 Disclosure (Risk management)

November 2019

• 

Interim Review and dividend 
proposal (Finance)

•  Board Diversity Policy (Governance)

September 2019

•  Review of the Directors’ conflicts 
of interest register (Conduct)

•  Group Profit Share Scheme 

Rules (Stakeholders)

58

Record plc Annual Report 2020

Corporate governance report continued

Meeting frequency and attendance
The Board met six times between 1 April 2019 and 31 March 2020 
to review financial performance and to follow the schedule of 
matters reserved for its decision and approval. Comprehensive 
Board papers, comprising an agenda and formal reports and 
briefing documents, are sent to Directors in advance of each 
meeting. Directors are regularly informed by senior executives 
and external advisers on the Group’s affairs, including commercial, 
regulatory, legal, corporate governance and other relevant matters.

Appropriate and timely notice is given of all Board meetings and all 
Directors receive information in advance so that if they are unable 
to attend their input can be tabled and taken into consideration. 
The Board has twice-yearly offsite strategy meetings and additional 
meetings as required to address specific issues. Any concerns 
raised by Directors which are not resolved are recorded in the 
Board minutes. No such matters were noted during the year 
ended 31 March 2020.

Directors are expected to attend all meetings of the Board. Details 
of Board meeting attendance are included in the table below:

Board effectiveness
Board induction and training
New Directors appointed to the Board receive advice as to the 
legal obligations arising from the role of a director of a UK-listed 
company as part of a tailored induction programme. This training 
includes briefings with the Chairman, Executive Directors and 
senior management to help new Directors to familiarise themselves 
with their duties and the Group’s culture and values, strategy, 
business model, businesses, operations, risks and governance 
arrangements.

The Company Secretary, under the direction of the Chairman, 
is responsible for maintaining an adequate continuing education 
programme, reminding the Directors of their duties and obligations 
on a regular basis, ensuring good information flow between the 
Board, its Committees and management and assisting with 
Directors’ continuing professional development needs.

On an on-going basis all Directors have access to independent 
professional advice, when required, at the Company’s expense 
as well as to the advice and services of the Company Secretary. 

Meetings in the year: 6 

Neil Record 

Jane Tufnell 

Rosemary Hilary 

Tim Edwards 

6/6 

6/6 

6/6 

5/6 

James Wood-Collins  4/5 

Steve Cullen  

Leslie Hill  

Bob Noyen 

6/6 

6/6 

6/6 

 Tim Edwards was unable to attend 
the Board meeting held in March 2020 
due to a prior commitment.

 James Wood-Collins resigned 
effective 13 February 2020; he did not 
attend the February Board meeting.

Each Director unable to attend a meeting gave their apologies 
in advance. 

The Non-executive Directors met without the Executive Directors 
on several occasions throughout the year, prior to scheduled 
meetings.

Board performance evaluation
The Board is required by the Code to undertake an annual 
evaluation of its performance. The Code states that “There should 
be a formal and rigorous annual evaluation of the performance of 
the board, its committees, the chair and individual directors”.

The Code recommends that evaluation of the board of FTSE 350 
companies should be externally facilitated at least every three 
years. Given the recent changes to the Board structure, the Board 
agreed that an external evaluation of performance was not 
appropriate at the current time and delegated responsibility for 
the review to Jane Tufnell, Senior Independent Director and Chair 
of the Nomination Committee. Board members were asked to 
anonymously complete a survey focusing on Board structure, 
information and dynamics and Jane also held individual private 
meetings with all the Board members to canvas opinions. 
The survey responses and the comments made during the 
private sessions were recorded and collated into a report 
which documented the observations made and also assessed 
the activities and achievements of the Board and its Committees 
during the period under review. Members were also invited to 
separately approach the Chairman or Company Secretary with 
any individual concerns or comments they had. No concerns 
were raised directly to the Chairman or the Company Secretary.

As in previous evaluations, the review of the comments made 
during the evaluation process identified no serious concerns over 
the functioning of the Board, its members or its Committees. 

Individual appraisal of each Director’s performance is undertaken 
by the Chief Executive Officer and the Chairman. The Senior 
Independent Director conducts an annual appraisal of the 
performance of the Chairman with input from the other Board 
members. The outcome of these appraisals in 2020 was positive 
and all roles were considered to be undertaken effectively.

Record plc Annual Report 2020

59

 Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional information 
Corporate governance report continued

Corporate governance framework
The Board has established a framework of committees and 
sub-committees to ensure robust corporate governance practices 
throughout the business. The Board is confident that this structure 
is appropriate and that the delegation of responsibilities allows the 
business to operate in a structured manner and to respond rapidly 
when issues arise.

The diagram below gives an overview of the Group’s core 
governance framework.

Board

Board Committees

Nomination

Remuneration

Audit and Risk

Operational Committees

Executive

Investment

Risk Management

Board Committees
The Board has established three Board Committees and delegated 
authority to each Committee to enable it to execute its duties 
appropriately. The annual reports of the three Committees provide 
a statement of each Committee’s activities in the year:

•  Nomination Committee – report set out on pages 62 and 63;

•  Audit and Risk Committee – report set out on pages 64 to 69; 

and 

•  Remuneration Committee – report set out on pages 70 to 85. 

The Committees operate on written terms of reference, which are 
reviewed annually and which are available on the Group’s website 
or on request from the Company Secretary at the registered office 
address. The Chair of each Committee reports regularly to the 
Board.

The work undertaken by the Nomination, Audit and Risk 
and Remuneration Committees was reviewed by the respective 
Committee Chair to assess each Committee’s effectiveness 
during the year. The reviews concluded that the Committees 
were operating in an effective manner and no concerns were 
raised and these conclusions were reported to the 
Board accordingly.

Operational Committees
The Board has also established three Committees responsible for 
operational oversight and decision making as follows:

Executive Committee
Role: The Executive Committee is the decision-making body for all 
day-to-day operations as delegated by the Board and Record plc’s 
subsidiaries. 

Members: The Committee comprises the Chief Executive Officer 
as Chair, the two other Executive Directors, the Chief Operating 
Officer, a Managing Director and the Head of Human Resources. 
Members of the Senior Management are invited to attend as 
deemed appropriate. 

The Head of Global Sales was appointed to the Committee in 
April 2020.

Meetings: The Committee meets formally once a month and holds 
regular operational update meetings. Standing agenda review 
items for formal meetings include clients and client prospects, 
the management accounts, departmental KPI data, compliance 
issues, systems development, projects and resourcing. Operational 
policy documents are regularly reviewed by the Committee prior to 
formal approval by the Board or the appropriate Board Committee. 
The Head of Compliance and Risk is a regular attendee of 
meetings (attending eight out of twelve meetings in the year 
under review). 

Reporting: Minutes of all meetings are circulated to the Board for 
review and comment.

60

Record plc Annual Report 2020

Corporate governance report continued

Investment Committee
Role: The Board has delegated the responsibility for authorising 
changes to existing investment processes and for approving new 
investment strategies to the Investment Committee. 

Members: The Committee consists of the Chief Investment Officer, 
the Chief Executive Officer, the Group Chairman, the Head of 
Portfolio Management, and the Head of Investment Strategy. 

Meetings: The Committee meets as necessary, responding both 
to internal developments and external events. 

Reporting: Reports on the activities of the Committee are 
presented at each formal Board meeting for review and comment.

Risk Management Committee
Role: The Audit and Risk Committee has delegated to the Risk 
Management Committee the task of overseeing and mitigating 
risks arising across the activities of Record Currency Management 
Limited, the regulated entity within the Group. 

Members: The Chief Operating Officer, the Chief Financial Officer, 
the Chief Technology Officer, the Head of Operations, the Head of 
Portfolio Management, the Head of Portfolio Implementation, the 
Head of Trading, the Head of Compliance and Risk and the Head 
of Front Office Risk Management are all members of the 
Committee. 

Meetings: The Committee meets at least once a month and as 
necessary in response to individual or specific events requiring 
review. 

Reporting: The minutes of meetings are circulated to the Audit 
and Risk Committee and a report on the Risk Management 
Committee’s activities is presented by the Chief Operating Officer, 
as the Committee Chair, at each Audit and Risk Committee 
meeting.

Internal control and risk management
The Board has overall responsibility for the Group’s systems of 
internal control and the management of significant risks. The Board 
sets appropriate policies on internal control which are reviewed 
annually, and authority is delegated to the following Committees 
and senior personnel to implement and apply those policies:

•  the Executive Committee;

•  the Audit and Risk Committee;

•  the Investment Committee; and

•  the Risk Management Committee.

The Board seeks ongoing assurance from these Committees and 
senior management about the effectiveness of the internal controls, 
which include operational and compliance controls, risk 
management and the Group’s high-level internal control 
arrangements. Such a system of internal controls is designed 
to manage, rather than eliminate, risk of failure to meet business 
objectives and can only provide reasonable and not absolute 
assurance against material misstatements or loss.

Further information on the Group’s risk management framework is 
provided on pages 38 to 45 of the Strategic report.

The Audit and Risk Committee has undertaken a review of the 
effectiveness of internal controls for the year ended 31 March 2020 
and is satisfied that the internal control environment is appropriate 
(see “Internal controls and risk management” on pages 67 and 68).

Approved by the Board and signed on its behalf by:

Joanne Manning
Company Secretary

18 June 2020

Record plc Annual Report 2020

61

 Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional informationNomination Committee report

This year the Nomination 
Committee has worked hard to 
evolve the Board and I’m extremely 
confident that our selection of 
Leslie Hill as Chief Executive Officer, 
will reap significant rewards for 
the Record Group.

Jane Tufnell
Chair of the Nomination Committee

The Board considered the Committee’s recommendation at a later 
meeting on 13 February and agreed that James would stand down 
as CEO and all Record directorships with immediate effect and that 
Leslie Hill would be appointed as CEO of Record plc with 
immediate effect; CEO of Record Currency Management 
Limited subject to approval by the FCA, which was confirmed 
on 24 April 2020; Director of Record Group Services Limited 
with immediate effect and CEO of Record Currency Management 
(US) Inc. 

The Committee looks forward to working with Leslie as CEO 
going forward.

Extension of the appointment term for Rosemary Hilary
In May 2019 the Committee reviewed the extension of the 
appointment term for Rosemary Hilary as a Non-executive Director 
following its expiry after the initial three year term, Rosemary having 
been appointed on 1 June 2016. Rosemary was not present for 
this review. It was agreed that it was in the interest of both 
Record plc and Record Currency Management Limited that 
Rosemary be re-appointed on the same terms for a further 
period of three years, which may be extended further at the sole 
and absolute discretion of Record plc and Record Currency 
Management Limited. A recommendation was put to the Board 
accordingly and unanimously approved.

Board diversity
The Group’s Board Diversity Policy was last reviewed by the 
Committee in November 2019. The Committee agreed the policy 
remained appropriate. The Committee has also acknowledged that 
future Executive Director succession planning should embrace the 
benefits of diversity, including gender diversity, to ensure that any 
individual selected will add to the Board’s mix of perspective, 
experience, background and personal attributes. 

The Committee is satisfied that the current composition of the 
Board is appropriate and meets the gender target set in the 
Group’s Board Diversity Policy. 

Dear Shareholder

I am pleased to present the Nomination Committee report 
for the year ending 31 March 2020.

Key responsibilities
The key responsibilities of the Committee are to:

•  review the structure, size and composition of the Board 

and Committees including the diversity and balance of skills 
and experience;

•  consider succession planning for Directors and other 

senior management;

• 

identify and nominate for the approval of the Board 
candidates to fill Board vacancies; and

•  review annually the time commitment required of 

Non-Executive Directors.

Review of the period
The Committee met eight times during the year. The key 
matters considered during these meetings were as follows:

Board composition
Chief Executive Officer
The Committee has been aware for some time of the need for 
the business to be more responsive to the needs and demands 
of clients in an ever evolving environment. The Committee met in 
January and decided that the Chief Executive Officer role within 
Record required a deep understanding of the Group’s ability to 
address these clients’ demands and their currency exposures. 
The Committee concluded that Leslie Hill has the necessary 
insight and is ideally suited to lead the business in this client-led 
changing environment. 

Further meetings occurred in February at which the Committee 
was assured that Leslie would accept this role and that James 
Wood-Collins had agreed to resign. The Committee therefore 
recommended to the Board on 13 February that Leslie Hill should 
replace James Wood-Collins as Chief Executive Officer.

62

Record plc Annual Report 2020

Nomination Committee report

Role of the Committee
The role of the Nomination Committee is to ensure that 
the Board has the optimal talents and experience to enable 
the Company to grow, compete in its markets and manage 
risks effectively.

The Committee serves both Record plc and the Group’s 
FCA regulated entity, Record Currency Management Limited. 
The Boards of the two companies are identical to facilitate 
full regulatory oversight and common corporate governance 
practices. References to the “Board” refer to the Boards of 
both Record plc and Record Currency Management Limited.

Committee meeting 
attendance

Jane Tufnell 

Rosemary Hilary 

Tim Edwards 

Neil Record 

8/8

8/8

8/8

7/8

Neil Record was unable 
to attend the Committee 
meeting held in 
April 2019 due to a 
prior commitment.

Tenure and effectiveness of the Chairman
The UK Corporate Governance Code recommends that the 
Chair should not remain in post beyond nine years from the date 
of their appointment to the Board. The Committee is aware that 
Neil Record has been in post since Record’s IPO in 2007.

During its review of this tenure, the Committee has been mindful of:

a)  discussion of the issue by the Committee Chair with 

major shareholders; and

b)  an appreciation of the performance and continuity of the Board 
Chair during a period of transition of Chief Executive Officer.

The Committee concluded that Neil’s experience in the currency 
industry as well as his leadership and challenge to the Board 
during this time of transition of the executive team supported a 
decision to retain him as Chair for the foreseeable future. The 
Committee Chair conducted a review of the Board Chair with all 
Board members in May 2020. The review concluded that Neil had 
made a very positive contribution in the period and in particular 
dealing with the departure of James as Chief Executive and the 
appointment of Leslie.

The tenure of the Chair will continue to be reviewed by the 
Committee on an annual basis.

Performance of the Directors and the Board
In September 2019 the Committee considered the 
competency and performance review documents for 2019 
completed in respect of the following Executive Directors and 
senior managers who held significant influence function roles 
at that time as defined by the FCA:

•  James Wood-Collins, Chief Executive Officer

•  Leslie Hill, Head of Client Team

•  Bob Noyen, Chief Investment Officer

•  Steve Cullen, Chief Financial Officer

•  Joel Sleigh, Chief Operating Officer

•  Dmitri Tikhonov, Managing Director 

•  Grady Laurie, Head of Compliance and Risk

•  Kevin Ayles, Head of Human Resources

The Committee acknowledged it was content with the 
competency assessments and performance evaluations made 
and that it had no concerns regarding the performance of any of 
the individuals reviewed. 

In June 2020, the Committee reviewed the performance of the 
Board and Board Committees. It concluded that the timetable of 
meetings, the issues addressed and the time committed by 
Non-executive Directors was appropriate. It also concluded that 
the Board Committee Chairs continue to add value and therefore 
should remain in post and this was recommended to the Board, 
which gave its approval to continue the tenure of existing Chairs.

Approved by the Committee and signed on its behalf by:

Jane Tufnell
Chair of the Nomination Committee

18 June 2020

Record plc Annual Report 2020

63

Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional information  
Audit and Risk Committee report

I am grateful to my fellow 
Committee members for their 
continued commitment, enabling 
us to challenge the operational and 
regulatory activities of the Group 
whilst also providing support and 
advice to management.

Rosemary Hilary
Chair of the Audit and Risk Committee

The full terms of reference of the Committee comply with the UK 
Corporate Governance Code (the “Code”) and are available on the 
Group’s website or from the Company Secretary at the registered 
office address.

Membership of the Committee
The Committee has been chaired by Rosemary Hilary since 
September 2016. Rosemary is supported by the other 
independent Directors: Jane Tufnell and Tim Edwards.

Given her accounting and regulatory background, the Board 
considers that Rosemary is the most appropriate independent 
Director for the role of Audit and Risk Committee Chair and this 
view is supported by the other members of the Committee. 
The Board is satisfied that by virtue of their previous experience 
gained in other organisations, the Committee members collectively 
have competence relevant to the sector in which the Group 
operates. The biographical details of the Committee members 
are set out on pages 52 and 53.

The composition of the Committee complies with the Code 
provision for smaller companies requiring at least two independent 
Non-executive Directors throughout the year. However, Record has 
confirmed with the FCA that it will have at least three independent 
Non-executive Directors serving on the Committee at all times and 
the Committee membership has always satisfied this undertaking.

Dear Shareholder

I am pleased to present the Audit and Risk Committee report for 
the year ending 31 March 2020.

Committee duties
Under its terms of reference the Committee is tasked with the 
following:

•  monitoring the integrity of the Group’s financial statements 

including the review of this Annual Report and any other formal 
announcements relating to the Group’s performance;

•  overseeing whistleblowing arrangements by which staff may 

raise concerns about possible improprieties in financial reporting 
or other matters;

•  reviewing the Group’s internal control and risk management 

procedures;

•  reviewing the operational conflicts of interest framework and 
making recommendations to the Board and management as 
appropriate;

•  monitoring and reviewing the effectiveness of the Group’s 

internal audit function;

•  making recommendations relating to the appointment, 
re-appointment and removal of the external auditor;

•  overseeing the tender of external audit services; 

•  approving the remuneration and terms of engagement of the 

external auditor;

•  reviewing and monitoring the independence and objectivity of 

the external auditor, and reviewing the effectiveness of the audit 
process; and

•  overseeing the provision of any non-audit services by the 

external auditor.

64

Record plc Annual Report 2020

Audit and Risk Committee report

Role of the Committee
The role of the Audit and Risk Committee is to encourage 
and safeguard a high standard of integrity in financial 
reporting, risk management and internal controls for the 
Group, having regard to laws and regulations applicable to 
the Group and the provisions of the UK Corporate 
Governance Code.

The Committee serves both Record plc and the Group’s 
FCA regulated entity, Record Currency Management Limited. 
The Boards of the two companies are identical to facilitate 
full regulatory oversight and common corporate governance 
practices. References to the “Board” refer to the Boards of 
both Record plc and Record Currency Management Limited. 

Committee meeting 
attendance

Rosemary Hilary 

Jane Tufnell 

Tim Edwards 

6/6

6/6

6/6

Committee Chair meetings
During the year the Chair of the Committee has had separate 
discussions with the key people involved in the Company’s 
governance, including the Board Chairman, the Chief Executive 
Officer, the Chief Financial Officer, the Chief Operating Officer, 
the Head of Compliance and Risk and also the external audit 
partner and the internal audit partner to obtain updates and 
insights into business activities.

Committee evaluation
An internal review of Committee effectiveness was overseen by the 
Company Secretary in April 2020. The review was based on input 
from Board members, senior management, the internal audit 
partner and the external audit partner. The conclusion was that 
the Committee was effective in carrying out its duties.

Committee meetings
The Committee met six times during the year ending 
31 March 2020, being four quarterly meetings plus two additional 
meetings ahead of results announcements. The meetings were 
also attended by the Chief Executive Officer, the Head of 
Compliance and Risk, the Chief Financial Officer and the Chief 
Operating Officer. Representatives of the external auditor and the 
internal auditor were present at all of the meetings. Minutes of the 
meetings were documented by the Company Secretary and 
retained on file.

In light of the covid-19 crisis, the Committee has met on a monthly 
basis since the financial year end, resulting in four meetings being 
held since 1 April 2020.

Committee member meeting attendance for the year ending 
31 March 2020 is detailed above.

The Committee also separately met the Group’s external auditor 
on four occasions and the internal auditor on three occasions, 
providing an opportunity for them, privately and in confidence, 
to raise matters of concern. 

The Chair of the Committee reported regularly to the Board on 
the Committee’s activities, identifying any matters on which the 
Committee considered that action was required, and made 
recommendations on the steps to be taken.

Record plc Annual Report 2020

65

Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional information  
Audit and Risk Committee report continued

Key areas of focus
Review of the regulatory landscape
Briefings on regulatory developments were provided to the 
Committee at each meeting by Deloitte as internal auditor and 
the Head of Compliance and Risk. Topics included the Senior 
Managers and Certification Regime, Brexit, LIBOR transition, FCA 
policy and discussion statements, FRC guidance and regulatory 
changes in other jurisdictions relevant to Record. 

Senior Managers and Certification Regime (“SMCR”)
The Committee was mindful of the implementation of the SMCR 
regime for Record (there was a staged implementation with banks 
first in 2016, then other companies e.g. insurance underwriters 
next). Record was in the last phase of implementation, with effect 
from 9 December 2019 and so, in the 12 months before the 
implementation date, requested regular updates from the Head 
of Compliance and Risk on the status of the SMCR project at 
Record and the actions being taken by management. Input from 
the CEO and the Head of Human Resources was taken into 
account. The Committee also commissioned an internal audit 
high level “inflight” review to appraise the SMCR project plan on 
an ongoing basis and provide feedback on the assumptions and 
actions being taken. Throughout the period the project remained 
on track and compliance with the new regime was achieved by 
the 9 December deadline. 

Brexit
The Committee closely monitored management’s Brexit 
preparations and the contingency plan for a hard Brexit to ensure 
Record was prepared for all possible outcomes. Ahead of the 
Brexit date of 31 January 2020 the Committee was content that 
Record was suitably prepared and that, in the event of a hard 
Brexit, Record could continue to serve all of its existing EU27 
clients under existing investment management agreements and 
data protection wording. The Committee will continue to review 
the position during the transition period and thereafter.

Cyber security 
The Committee has remained conscious that cyber security presents 
an ongoing significant risk to financial services companies and has 
continued to monitor, review and challenge Record’s cyber and data 
security processes, management’s approach to developments and 
initiatives and management’s response to issues identified internally, 
by the internal auditor and by third party advisers. The need to 
remain vigilant is recognised and cyber security will continue to 
be a focus for the Committee going forward.

Committee activities
The Committee discharged its responsibilities under its terms of 
reference by the following actions:

•  reviewing the form, content and integrity of financial information 

prior to release, including the Annual and Interim Reports 
(May 2019, November 2019 and June 2020);

•  reviewing the content of each of the Interim Management 
Statements for subsequent Board approval (April, July, 
October 2019 and January 2020);

•  reviewing the adequacy and effectiveness of the Group’s 

internal controls and risk management systems (May 2019 
and June 2020);

•  considering the Risk Appetite statement, ICAAP document and 

Pillar 3 disclosures prior to their recommendation for 
acceptance by the Board (April, July 2019 and January 2020);

•  receiving and reviewing internal audit reports and discussing the 

findings and management’s responses (April, May, July, 
October, November 2019 and January 2020);

•  evaluating the performance and independence of the 

internal auditor during the engagement period (May 2019 
and June 2020);

•  reviewing the independence of the Group’s external auditor 
and the nature of non-audit services supplied by the auditor 
(May 2019 and June 2020);

•  reviewing the external auditor’s audit strategy for the interim 

review and the final audit (October 2019);

•  assessing the external auditor’s concluding report for the interim 
review and the year end financial statements (May, November 
2019 and June 2020);

•  evaluating the performance of the external auditor over the 

period (May 2019 and June 2020);

•  reviewing regular reports by the Head of Compliance and Risk 
detailing internal compliance and risk management activities 
and issues (April, May, July, October, November 2019 and 
January 2020);

•  reviewing a “Risk Matrix” to ensure that key risks and risk 
movements are identified and addressed (April, May, July, 
October, November 2019 and January 2020);

•  examining departmental KPI and KRI data to ensure operational 
risks are identified and appropriately addressed by management 
(April, May, July, October, November 2019 and January 2020);

•  reviewing Risk Management Committee meeting minutes and 

summary activity reports by the Chief Operating Officer as Chair 
of the Risk Management Committee (April, May, July, October, 
November 2019 and January 2020); and

•  approving the Group’s whistleblowing policy, updated to 
clarify examples of malpractice and reporting procedures 
(October 2019).

66

Record plc Annual Report 2020

Audit and Risk Committee report continued

External audit tender
The Committee has been content with the level of external audit 
service provided by PwC, but due to a significant increase in fees 
over the two years to FY21 proposed by PwC in September 2019 
(reflecting increased work and regulatory requirements), 
the Committee agreed a tender process for the FY21 
statutory audit should be performed.

In line with FRC guidance the evaluation criteria were:

Covid-19 response
The Committee has met on a monthly basis to receive business 
updates, monitor management’s response to the covid-19 crisis 
and to ensure that appropriate processes and controls have 
remained in place during the period whilst all employees have 
been working from home. The Committee has welcomed the 
responsiveness of management to the situation and is supportive 
of the initiatives implemented to ensure the business can continue 
to operate under a strong control environment.

•  Organisation and industry experience

•  Resourcing and the engagement team

•  Audit approach and delivery

• 

Identification of specific technical issues

•  Quality assurance and independence

•  Value for money

This evaluation concluded that BDO LLP (“BDO”) offered an 
improved proposition in terms of value for money when considering 
Record’s size, sector and relative lack of complexity without any 
expected detriment to service levels, experience or capability. 
A proposal recommending the appointment of BDO to replace 
PwC was put to the Board accordingly in February 2020. 
The Board reviewed the selection rationale and confirmed the 
recommendation to appoint BDO was appropriate and agreed that 
shareholder approval of their appointment should be sought at the 
AGM on 4 August 2020. It was agreed PwC’s resignation should 
be effective as of the date of the AGM.

Third party assurance services
Due to changes to Ethical Standards relating to auditor 
independence and the provision of non-audit services by the 
auditor, the Committee decided to separate the provision of third 
party assurance services (i.e. Reporting Accountant and 
Independent Service Auditor (ISAE 3402/AT-C 320) reports on 
internal controls) from the provision of audit and related services. 
Following a search process the preferred supplier was RSM Risk 
Assurance Services LLP (“RSM”). Consequently, RSM was 
appointed to conduct the 2020 Reporting Accountant and 
Independent Service Auditor (ISAE 3402/AT-C 320) reports 
on internal controls, replacing PwC.

Record Currency Management (US) Inc. activities
During the year the implementation of the Dynamic Macro 
Currency strategy resulted in trading activity being conducted by 
the US subsidiary for the first time and increased the level of SEC 
and CFTC regulatory activities being undertaken. The Committee 
was keen to ensure that oversight of the US subsidiary and the 
controls in place reflected its increased activity and, accordingly, 
they sought and received assurances from management and the 
Head of Compliance and Risk. The Committee will continue to 
monitor the activity and assess whether the control environment, 
management oversight and compliance oversight remain aligned 
with the risk. An internal audit of US activity and its compliance 
with regulatory obligations has been scheduled as part of the 
2020/21 internal audit plan. 

Financial reporting
The Committee has thoroughly reviewed the half-year and annual 
results and the Annual Report, before recommending them to the 
Board for approval. 

During the year, the Committee also considered the significant 
financial and regulatory reporting issues and judgements made in 
connection with the financial statements and the appropriateness 
of accounting policies. In particular, the Committee considered 
management reports providing an assessment of the internal 
controls environment, going concern and the viability statement. 
The Committee is satisfied that all judgements made by 
management which affect financial reporting have been made in 
accordance with the Group’s accounting policies.

The Committee further considered reports from the external 
auditor, in particular its independent assessment of financial 
reporting and key controls, the audit opinion on the Annual 
Report and the independent review report on the half-year results.

The Committee is satisfied that the financial reporting control 
framework operated effectively after considering reports from 
both management and the external auditor.

The Committee has reviewed the narrative statements in the report 
and accounts to ensure they are fair, balanced and understandable 
and consistent with the reported results, and also the auditor’s 
findings report which identified no significant issues.

The Committee was satisfied with the content of the Annual Report, 
confirmed there were no significant issues or concerns to be 
addressed and recommended that it be approved by the Board.

Internal controls and risk management
A significant part of the work of the Committee is providing 
oversight and independent challenge to the internal controls and 
risk management systems of the Group. 

A “Risk Matrix”, which identifies key risk areas that may impact 
the Group, is used by the Committee and compared against a risk 
assessment prepared by the internal auditor to ensure that material 
risk areas are being appropriately identified and addressed by 
management and that movements in risks and associated 
business impact are identified promptly so that appropriate action 
can be taken. The “Risk Matrix” continues to be enhanced to assist 
risk monitoring and this is welcomed by the Committee. 

The Committee reviews all minutes of Risk Management 
Committee meetings and the Chief Operating Officer as Chair of 
the Risk Management Committee was present at all meetings to 
answer questions raised. 

Record plc Annual Report 2020

67

 Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional informationAudit and Risk Committee report continued

Internal controls and risk management continued
In January 2020 the Committee undertook a detailed review of the 
Group’s ICAAP document and paid particular attention to the stress 
test scenarios and agreed they were appropriate. The Committee 
also reviewed a revised risk appetite statement, updated to better 
align with the risk matrix, the underlying risk management framework 
and the risk management section of the Annual Report. 
The Committee welcomed and supported these changes.

The Committee has reviewed and evaluated the system of internal 
controls and risk management operated within the Group, and is 
satisfied that the internal control environment is appropriate. More 
information on the Group’s risk management framework is given in 
the Strategic report on pages 38 to 40.

Internal audit
The internal audit function undertakes a programme of reviews as 
approved by the Committee, reporting the results together with its 
advice and recommendations to the Committee. The function is 
provided by Deloitte LLP (“Deloitte”) under an outsourcing contract 
which commenced in May 2010. The objectives and responsibilities 
of internal audit are set out in a charter reviewed and approved on 
an annual basis. The charter was last reviewed and approved by the 
Committee in June 2020. Deloitte reports directly to the Committee 
and the relationship is subject to periodic review.

The Committee and the internal auditor have developed a planning 
process to ensure that the audit work performed focuses on 
significant risks. The plans include deep-dive thematic and 
risk-based audits and also high level in-flight reviews of specific 
projects as agreed by the Committee, Deloitte and management. 
Each review is scoped at the start of the audit to ensure an 
appropriate focus reflecting business activities, the market 
environment and regulatory matters. The plans are periodically 
reviewed to ensure they are adapted as necessary to capture 
changes in the Group’s risk profile.

The Committee has received regular reports on the programme of 
reviews and internal audit findings at each of its meetings during 
the course of the year. The Committee has reviewed the findings 
and recommendations made by the internal auditor and has aimed 
to ensure that any issues arising are suitably addressed by 
management in an effective and timely manner.

During the year to 31 March 2020, the following internal audit 
reports conducted by Deloitte were reviewed by the Committee:

•  Regulatory reporting review

•  Discretionary management review

• 

Inflight review of the SMCR implementation project (three 
reports)

• 

Inflight review of Record’s IT strategy project (two reports)

•  Marketing and distribution review

The Committee has reviewed Deloitte’s work and discussed the 
delivery of internal audit with management and is satisfied with the 
internal audit work conducted and the coverage and standard of 
the reports produced. The Committee is content that sufficient and 
appropriate resources are dedicated to the internal audit function 
and this has been reported to and noted by the Board.

External audit
PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP (“PwC”) was appointed in 2017 to 
conduct the external audit of the Record Group. The fees and the 
terms of the audit engagement letter are agreed by the Committee 
on an annual basis.

The Committee has reviewed reports from the external auditor 
on the audit plan (including the proposed materiality level for the 
performance of the annual audit), the status of its audit work and 
issues arising. The Committee discussed the findings with the 
auditor and was satisfied with the conclusion reached by the 
auditor that there was no evidence of material misstatements. 
The Committee has confirmed that no material items remained 
unadjusted in the financial statements.

An assessment of the quality and effectiveness of PwC’s FY20 
audit was considered by way of a review completed by the 
Committee with the assistance of senior members of the Finance 
Team and with reference to the FRC’s practice aid on assessing 
audit quality, published in December 2019. The Committee 
evaluated the judgements; mindset and culture; skills, character 
and knowledge; and quality control demonstrated by PwC 
throughout the audit process and concluded that PwC had 
provided a quality external audit service which was appropriate 
for the Group given its size and structure.

External auditor independence
Policy on provision of non-audit services by the external auditor
During the year the Committee operated a policy covering the 
provision of non-audit services by the external auditor to ensure 
that the ongoing independence and objectivity of the external 
auditor is not compromised. The policy ensured adherence to the 
Financial Reporting Council’s revised Ethical Standard issued in 
June 2016, which implemented EU audit regulations restricting the 
supply of non-audit services to Public Interest Entities (“PIEs”) by 
statutory auditors. The policy restricted the nature and value of 
non-audit services that could be provided by the external auditor 
using a “black list” of prohibited services, setting a cap on the level 
of permitted non-audit services and establishing the requirement 
that permitted services above a pre-determined limit should be 
approved by the Committee before the assignment is undertaken. 

In December 2019 the FRC published its revised Ethical Standard 
2019, effective from 15 March 2020. The Committee has 
considered the FRC’s revisions and approved changes to Record’s 
policy regarding the provision of permitted non-audit services by 
the external auditor in order to ensure compliance with the revised 
Ethical Standard going forward.

Under the Ethical Standard the aggregate of fees for all non-audit 
services, excluding audit related assurance services required under 
regulation, may not exceed 70% of the average of the audit fees 
for the preceding three year period. The Committee considers it 
best practice to adhere to the fee cap on an annual basis, effective 
from the first year of application for Record of the Ethical Standard 
(i.e. the year ended 31 March 2018) and monitors fees accordingly.

68

Record plc Annual Report 2020

Audit and Risk Committee report continued

Non-audit services undertaken by the external auditor
The following permitted non-audit services, pre-approved by the 
Committee and within a pre-determined cost limit, have been 
undertaken by PwC in the year under review:

• 

independent auditor report to the FCA on compliance with client 
asset rules; and

•  the interim review work performed on the half-year accounts.

Details of the total fees paid to PwC are set out in note 5 to the 
accounts. Non-audit fees, excluding audit-related assurance 
services required under law or regulation, were equivalent to 0% 
(2019: 47%) of audit fees and were therefore within the permitted 
cap of 70%.

Assessment of external auditor independence
The Committee was satisfied that the quantity and nature of 
non-audit work undertaken during the year did not impair PwC’s 
independence or objectivity and that its appointment for these 
assignments was in the best interests of the Group and its 
shareholders.

The Committee is satisfied that the external auditor has maintained 
its independence and objectivity over the period of its engagement.

Looking forward
As well as considering the standing items of business, the 
Committee will continue to focus on the following areas during the 
year ahead:

•  cyber security;

•  response to the covid-19 crisis; 

•  risk monitoring; 

•  strategic focus, different product offerings and the use of new 

financial instruments; 

•  the regulatory landscape in the UK and other jurisdictions 

relevant to Record; and

•  Brexit.

Approved by the Committee and signed on its behalf by:

Rosemary Hilary
Chair of the Audit and Risk Committee

Record plc Annual Report 2020

69

 Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional informationRemuneration report

Our remuneration policy is 
designed to act in the interests 
of all our key stakeholders: our 
clients, shareholders, employees 
and regulators.

Tim Edwards
Chair of the Remuneration Committee

Chair of the Remuneration Committee’s statement
Introduction
I am pleased to present our Remuneration report and to introduce 
our new Remuneration Policy for Directors. Our policy is designed 
to promote the long-term, sustainable growth of the Group, and to 
be consistent with the prudent management of risk.

Set out on subsequent pages are: 

•  the Remuneration Policy;

•  the Annual Remuneration Report for 2019-20; and 

•  the role and activity of the Remuneration Committee.

Remuneration principles
Our approach to remuneration is driven by long-term thinking. 
Identifying, developing and appropriately compensating our 
high performers, at all levels of the business, is critical to 
long-term business success and is aligned to both clients’ 
and shareholders’ interests.

Our key remuneration principles are:

•  A consistent remuneration structure for all employees, not just 

Directors, which is transparent and straightforward.

•  Our remuneration structures should reward and incentivise 

profitable business growth.

•  Remuneration should comprise two components: (i) a fixed 
salary and (ii) a variable component based on individual 
performance.

•  Directors’ remuneration should include a deferred element 

which is satisfied by paying it in the form of equity.

Directors’ Remuneration Policy
As required after a three-year cycle, the Directors are presenting their 
Remuneration Policy to shareholders for approval at this year’s AGM.

The policy will come into effect following shareholder approval 
on 4 August 2020 and has been modified as follows. Whilst being 
based on the Remuneration Policy already approved by 
shareholders in 2017, there are four new features, 
summarised below:

•  Commission – a commission scheme for senior employees, 

but not Directors, in which they are rewarded for the 
introduction of sustainable new business.

•  Pension – the alignment of pension contributions across all 
employees of the Group by April 2022, at a level of 11%.

•  GPS – a tighter gearing of the Group Profit Share Scheme to 

the Company’s operating performance.

•  Share Option Scheme – a holding requirement such that for any 
options exercised between the third and fifth year, shares would 
be held until the end of the fifth year. 

In addition, the allocation of the Share Scheme (2% per annum 
of the market capitalisation of Record plc being approximately 
4 million shares) will be changed from a fixed 1% allocated to 
Executive Directors and a fixed 1% being allocated to staff to 
a more flexible arrangement under which the Remuneration 
Committee and management will decide the allocation of share 
option awards between Executive Directors and staff within the 
scheme parameters described in the Remuneration Policy.

The Directors believe that this modified Remuneration Policy is 
more closely aligned to the strategic objectives of the Board.

Background to modified policy, leadership and strategy
As announced on 13 February 2020, we appointed a new Chief 
Executive Officer, Leslie Hill, as part of a leadership change better 
suited to delivering the growth opportunities which the Company 
anticipates. Leslie has proposed a new strategy for Record’s 
sustainable long-term growth as set out on pages 6 to 9. 

The Board has agreed corporate objectives for growth against 
which Leslie and her team will be measured over the coming 
year. Leslie Hill’s salary was increased to reflect her new 
responsibilities and her variable remuneration will be measured 
against these objectives.

Group performance for 2019-20
The year to 31 March 2020 has seen a 2.4% increase in revenue 
whereas operating profit decreased by 2.9% with a 6.8% increase 
in operating expenditure.

Our Group Profit Share Scheme pool was 31.4% of pre-GPS 
underlying operating profit, which represented £3.5 million, directly 
linking the Company’s financial performance to the size of the 
variable remuneration pool. The value delivered under the Group 
Profit Share Scheme increased by 3.8% compared to the 
previous period.

70

Record plc Annual Report 2020

Remuneration report

Role of the Committee
The role of the Remuneration Committee is to review 
and approve the remuneration strategies of the Group, 
encompassing the Chair, the Executive Directors, and the 
staff as a whole. The Committee also reviews and advises 
on the remuneration policy and ensures that it promotes 
good conduct consistent with sound and effective risk 
management, and is properly disclosed to Stakeholders.

Committee meeting 
attendance

Tim Edwards 

Rosemary Hilary 

Jane Tufnell 

8/8

8/8

8/8

Directors were awarded profit share units by the Remuneration 
Committee based on their individual level of performance 
measured against their objectives. Some discretion was exercised 
by the Committee in the allocation of these profit share units. 
The Committee had set stretching targets for the year and some of 
these targets were not fully met. However, following the change of 
leadership, some profit share units were topped up to incentivise 
the remaining Executive Directors during this transition. Details can 
be found within the Annual Report on Remuneration.

The Committee also received input from the Head of Compliance 
and Risk, who reports any legal or compliance issues that relate to 
Directors who are due to receive awards under the Scheme. 
Payments were made in accordance with the Group Profit Share 
Scheme rules and were approved by the Committee.

Option awards were made to Directors during the year and details 
can be found on page 81 and all awards were made in accordance 
with the Scheme rules. Management used the full allocation for 
granting options to staff below Board Director level this year and 
made awards in accordance with the Share Scheme rules.

No options vested for Directors during the year as the performance 
conditions had not been met. Details can be found on page 80.

Alignment with shareholders
As at 31 March 2020, 44.5% of the Company’s shares were 
held by the Chairman and Directors, and each of the current 
Executive Directors has a shareholding significantly greater 
than 1.5 times their salary. In addition, 69% of the Company’s 
employees are shareholders. 

With effect from 1 August 2020 and to encourage share 
ownership, any new Executive Director would be encouraged 
to build a shareholding of at least 1.5 times base salary, for 
example through the use of GPS and share option schemes, 
within a reasonable period of being appointed.

At the end of his/her employment, an Executive Director would 
need to retain a shareholding previously built up through the use 
of remuneration schemes, but excluding any shares acquired for 
cash, of a total of 1.5 times base salary, with half of this total 
being held for a period of one year and half of this total being 
held for a period of two years.

Engaging with employees 
The Committee takes an active involvement in remuneration for the 
whole Company. Record staff participate in both the Group Profit 
Share Scheme and the Share Option Scheme and the Committee 
reviews all GPS and option awards. A significant proportion of our 
colleagues are shareholders, so are able to express their views in 
the same way as other shareholders.

When determining Executive Director remuneration arrangements 
the Committee takes into account pay conditions throughout the 
Group to ensure that the structure and quantum of Executive 
Directors’ pay remains appropriate in this context. 

The Committee seeks the views of the wider workforce through 
the use of employee surveys about their working experience at 
Record. Certain questions in the employee survey are specifically 
about remuneration, which allows the Committee to gain detailed 
feedback from staff on an anonymous basis. 

I have also taken on the role of Employee Engagement Director, 
leading our workforce engagement initiatives, and through 
meetings and conversations with staff at various events I am 
able to seek employee views directly. 

Shareholder consultation
It remains our policy to discuss any substantive proposed changes 
to the Group’s remuneration structures with key external 
shareholders in advance of any implementation. The Remuneration 
Committee takes into account shareholder views received in relation 
to resolutions to be considered at the AGM each year, and values 
shareholder feedback when forming remuneration policy.

Looking ahead to 2020-21
With a focus on maintaining profitability and managing costs, 
no Company-wide salary increases were made in April 2020 and, 
with the exception of Leslie Hill on her promotion to CEO, none of 
the Executive Directors received a salary increase.

Tim Edwards
Chair of the Remuneration Committee

18 June 2020 

Record plc Annual Report 2020

71

Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional information  
Remuneration report continued

Remuneration Policy
The Directors’ Remuneration Policy, modified as described in the Remuneration Committee Chair’s statement and set out in full below, 
is proposed by the Remuneration Committee and the Board. Shareholders will be asked to approve the new policy at the 2020 AGM on 
4 August 2020. This policy will take effect for Directors from the date of its approval and is expected to be applied for the next three years.

Summary remuneration structure
The table below illustrates the remuneration structures that we have in place for Directors.

Options

Struck at market price with performance conditions

1/3 vests but 
held until year 5

1/3 vests but 
held until year 5

1/3 vests

Group Profit 
Share Scheme

Shares

1/3 shares 
released from 
lock up

1/3 shares 
released from 
lock up

1/3 shares 
released from 
lock up

Share Scheme

Cash

Pension and 
benefits

Cash

Salary

Cash

Year 0

Year 1

Year 2

Year 3

Year 4

Year 5

Note, Directors are required to take one third of their Group Profit Share 
payment in shares, which are locked up and released over three years. 
Directors can elect to take a further third of their Group Profit Share payment 
in shares, and these have no lock up.

Group Profit Share 
The Group Profit Share Scheme is our variable structure that all 
staff, including Directors, participate in. The purpose is to ensure 
that there is a transparent link between our business strategy and 
individual objectives, that the assessment of individual performance 
is clear, and that variable pay rewards high levels of performance. 

Annual corporate objectives are agreed by the Board and the CEO’s 
performance is measured against these objectives. Objectives are 
agreed for Executive Directors and all staff. GPS awards relate 
directly to each individual’s performance against objectives.

The Group Profit Share pool is linked to profitability and can vary 
between 25% to 35% of operating profits. The actual size is currently 
determined by the accumulation of the individual’s performance but 
the Committee intends to transition towards determining the size of 
the pool with a balanced scorecard approach.

Group Profit Share payments for Directors are determined by the 
Remuneration Committee, who also approved the pool size. 
The Scheme is discretionary and there is no contractual right to 
receive an award. 

Profit Share payments are made in cash and in shares. To ensure 
that the interests of management and shareholders are aligned, 
Directors and senior managers are required to take a proportion 
(initially a third) in shares, subject to a three year “lock up” period. 

These shares are released from lock up in three equal tranches 
on the first, second and third anniversary of the payment date. 
Additionally, Directors and senior managers are offered the 
opportunity to elect for up to a further third of their Profit Share 
to be paid in shares, which has no lock up. The remaining third 
is paid in cash.

Share Scheme
It is of great importance for the long term success of the business 
that the Group retains and motivates its current and future key 
employees, and that they are incentivised over the longer term in 
a manner which aligns their interests with shareholders. The Share 
Scheme has been designed to award share options to Directors 
and staff of Record. The Remuneration Committee can grant 
HMRC approved options (“Approved Options”) as well as 
unapproved options (“Unapproved Options”).

In total the size of the Share Scheme will be limited to 2% 
per annum of the market capitalisation of Record plc (being 
approximately 4 million shares). The 2% can be awarded to 
Directors and staff, within the limits described below.

Each participant may be granted Approved Options over shares 
with a total market value of up to £30,000 on the date of grant. 
There is no such limit on the value of Unapproved Options, which 
may be granted with any exercise price (including nil), although 
the Committee’s policy is for Unapproved Options awarded to 
Executive Directors to be granted with an exercise price equal 
to the market value of the shares on the date of grant.

The terms of options for Directors differ to those for all other staff. 
For Directors, the Remuneration Committee will limit the value of 
shares over which an option is granted to any Director in any year 
to a maximum of 200% of that Director’s salary for that year. 

72

Record plc Annual Report 2020

Remuneration report continued

All Director option awards will be subject to a performance 
condition based on Record’s annual cumulative EPS growth.  
EPS is used as a performance measure in line with the industry 
standard and shareholder interests. One third of the award will vest 
on each of the third, fourth and fifth anniversaries of the date of 
grant, subject to an EPS hurdle linked to the annualised EPS 
growth for the respective three, four and five year periods from 
date of grant. Awards that vest on the third and fourth year are 
required to be held until the fifth year.

Vesting is on a stepped basis, with 25% of each tranche vesting 
if EPS growth over the relevant period is at least RPI plus 4% per 
annum, increasing through 50% and 75% to 100% vesting if EPS 
growth exceeds RPI plus 13% per annum over the same period. 
Options under both the Approved and Unapproved schemes will 
be granted with an exercise price equal to the market value of the 
shares on the date of grant and the exercise price per share of 
Approved Options must be no lower than the market value of a 
share on the dealing day.

For staff below Director level, Approved Options become 
exercisable on the fourth anniversary of grant subject to the 
employee remaining in employment with the Group and, should 
they have been set, any other performance conditions being met. 
One quarter of any Unapproved Option becomes exercisable each 
year for four years, subject to the employee remaining in 
employment and, should they have been set, any other 
performance conditions being met.

The Remuneration Committee retains the power to grant options 
under the Share Scheme, and granted options to Board Directors 
during the year, although it can and has delegated to management 
the task of identifying suitable recipients of options and the number 
of shares to be put under option for those below Board level. 

Commission scheme
We will introduce a commission scheme with effect from June 
2020 both to reward and incentivise our staff to grow the business. 
Directors will not be participants, but Code staff (namely Executive 
Committee members who are not Directors) and other staff will be 
able to participate. The terms of the scheme have been outlined in 
the Remuneration Policy, even though Directors will not participate. 
Any participant is required to meet their individual performance 
objectives to be eligible for a payment. Any payment will be made 
in shares to Code staff, to be held for a year, and in cash for other 
staff. There is a robust process in place to ensure there are no 
conflicts. All payments will be reviewed by the Remuneration 
Committee after input from the Head of Compliance and Risk.

Change to Directors’ pensions
We are committed to aligning Director pension contributions with 
those of the majority of staff by 2022. Contributions to Directors 
will be decreased this year from 15.5% to 13.5% and further 
changes will be made so that by April 2022 we will have alignment 
across the Group at a single rate of 11%. Directors are able to 
contribute to a pension scheme or may receive payment in lieu if 
they have opted out of the pension scheme.

Remuneration Policy: comparison table for  
Executive Directors and staff
The table below provides a summary of the policy for each 
component part of remuneration for Executive Directors, subject to 
approval at the forthcoming AGM. The approach for all staff is also 
included to provide context for the remuneration for the entire 
workforce. There is a separate table for the Chairman and 
Non-executive Directors.

Element, purpose and  
link to strategy

Base salary
Fixed remuneration that reflects the role, 
responsibilities, experience and knowledge 
of the individual.

Current operation for employees

Policy for Executive Directors

Paid monthly and reviewed annually 
by management.

The Remuneration Committee reviews salaries 
for Executive Directors on an annual basis.

Any review will take into account market rates, 
business performance and individual 
contribution.

Any review will take into account market rates, 
business performance and individual 
contribution.

Commission
The Commission scheme is to reward and 
incentivise contributions to new business from 
the next generation. Any payments are 
authorised by the CEO and Head of Global 
Sales and approved by the Remuneration 
Committee after input from the Head of 
Compliance and Risk.

The scheme operates within a risk 
management framework to ensure products 
are appropriate for clients and any payment is 
made from profits. 

Benefits
To provide a benefits package that provides 
for the wellbeing of our colleagues.

There is no prescribed maximum salary. 
However, increases are normally expected 
to be in line with the typical level of increase 
awarded across the Group.

Executive Directors are not eligible to 
participate in the commission scheme.

All staff can participate. 

Staff will only receive a payment if they 
are meeting their individual performance 
objectives.

Code staff receive any payment in shares, 
locked up for a period of one year, whereas 
other staff will receive any payment in cash.

A range of benefits are offered including, 
but not limited to, private medical insurance, 
dental insurance, permanent health insurance, 
life assurance, personal accident insurance 
and annual holiday.

Executive Directors receive benefits on 
the same basis as all other employees, 
at the prevailing rates and nothing else.

Record plc Annual Report 2020

73

 Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional informationRemuneration report continued

Remuneration Policy continued
Remuneration Policy: comparison table for Executive Directors and staff continued

Element, purpose and  
link to strategy

Share Incentive Plan
The Group has an approved Share Incentive 
Plan (“SIP”). All staff are able to buy shares 
from pre-tax salary up to an HMRC-approved 
limit (£1,800 for the financial year ended 
31 March 2020), which is matched at a 
rate of 50%.

Pension
To provide an appropriate retirement income.

Current operation for employees

Policy for Executive Directors

All staff members are eligible to participate 
in the SIP.

Executive Directors may participate in the 
SIP on the same basis as other employees.

All staff are entitled to join the Group Personal 
Pension Scheme. This is a defined 
contribution plan to which the Group makes 
employer contributions and staff can choose 
to make additional personal contributions. 

Executive Directors receive an employer 
pension contribution of 13.5% of salary which 
can be paid into the Group Personal Pension 
Scheme or delivered as a cash allowance, 
aligned with that of the senior managers.

Senior managers receive an employer 
contribution of 13.5% and staff receive 
between 7.75% and 9%.

The Company is committed to aligning 
employer pension contributions for all staff, 
including Executive Directors, by 2022.

Group Profit Share Scheme
Variable remuneration scheme that allocates 
25% to 35% of operating profits to a Group 
Profit Share Pool, allocated to participants 
based on their role and individual level of 
performance.

All staff participate in the Group Profit 
Share Scheme. 

Executive Directors are eligible to participate 
in the Group Profit Share Scheme.

Profit Share payments relate to the 
responsibilities of the role and the individual 
level of performance against objectives for the 
relevant period.

The Remuneration Committee approves all 
payments to Executive Directors, which are 
based on individual performance against 
objectives for the relevant period.

Share Scheme
The Share Scheme allows the Remuneration 
Committee to grant options over up to 2% of 
the market capitalisation of Record plc (being 
approximately 4 million shares) per annum.

Staff members can take their Profit Share in 
cash or elect for up to a third in shares.

Senior managers are required to take 
one-third of their payment in shares subject to 
lock-up conditions of one to three years and 
in addition are offered the opportunity for up 
to a further third of the Profit Share to be paid 
in shares. The remaining amount is in cash.

Executive Directors are required to take one 
third of their payment in shares subject to 
lock-up conditions of one to three years. 
In addition they are offered the opportunity for 
up to a further third of their Profit Share to be 
paid in shares. The remaining amount will be 
paid in cash.

Whilst the Profit Share pool is capped based 
on the profitability of the Group and range 
stated above, there is no individual maximum 
entitlement set within this limit.

Malus and clawback provisions apply to all 
awards. Further details are set out below.

The Committee has discretion in the 
treatment of leavers as set out below.

All staff members are eligible to participate in 
the Share Scheme.

Executive Directors are eligible to participate 
in the Share Scheme.

Any share option grants are awarded by 
management on a discretionary basis.

The Remuneration Committee limits the value 
of shares over which an option is granted to 
any Director in any year to a maximum of 
200% of that Director’s salary for that year.

All share options awarded to Executive 
Directors are granted with an exercise price 
equal to the market value of the shares on the 
date of grant and are subject to a 
performance condition based on Record’s 
cumulative annual EPS growth with vesting 
on a stepped basis after three, four and five 
years. Awards that vest on the third and fourth 
year are required to be held until the fifth year.

Malus and clawback provisions apply to all 
awards. Further details are set out below.

The Committee has discretion in the treatment 
of leavers as set out below.

74

Record plc Annual Report 2020

Remuneration report continued

Remuneration policy for the Chairman and the Non-executive Directors
The table below sets out the remuneration policy for the Chairman and the Non-Executive Directors. In summary, they only receive fixed 
pay and benefits.

Element, purpose and  
link to strategy

Current operation for Chairman and  
Non-executive Directors

Further information

Fees/salary
Fixed remuneration that reflects the role, skills 
and experience

Benefits
To enable the Chairman and Non-executive 
Directors to carry out their roles

The Chairman’s salary is determined by the 
Remuneration Committee.

The Non-executive Directors’ fees are 
approved by the Board. 

Increases are normally expected to be in line 
with the typical level of increase awarded across 
the Group.

The Chairman receives benefits on the same 
basis as other Executive Directors, including 
pension, private medical insurance, dental 
insurance, permanent health insurance, life 
assurance, personal accident insurance and 
annual holiday.

Salaries and fees are reviewed annually. 
Any review will take into account market 
rates, business performance and 
individual contribution.

The Non-executive Directors receive expenses 
but do not receive any additional benefits.

Group Profit Share Scheme, Share 
Scheme, Commission and SIP

The Chairman and the Non-executive 
Directors do not participate in any of 
these schemes.

Service contracts and loss of office payment policy
We provide all Executive Directors with service agreements. 
None of the service agreements are for a fixed term and all include 
provisions for termination on six months’ notice by either party. 
Service agreements do not contain any contractual entitlement to 
receive bonuses, nor to participate in the Group Profit Share 
Scheme or the Group Share Scheme, nor to receive any fixed 
provision for termination compensation.

Engaging with employees and shareholders, decision 
making processes and general employee pay and conditions
The Group’s approach to engaging with employees and 
shareholders are detailed in the Chair of the Remuneration 
Committee’s statement. The Group’s remuneration 
decision-making processes are also summarised in that 
statement and detailed further above in the Remuneration Policy, 
as well as the general approach to employee pay and conditions.

Non-executive Directors are appointed for an initial three-year 
period and are required to provide at least six months’ notice of 
their intention to resign. Their continued engagement is subject to 
annual re-election by shareholders at the Company’s AGM. 

The terms and conditions of appointment of the Executive 
Directors and Non-executive Directors are available for inspection 
at the Company’s registered office.

When an Executive Director leaves the Group, the Remuneration 
Committee will review the circumstances and apply the appropriate 
treatment. Any payments that are made will be in line with 
contractual entitlements and statutory requirements only. Where 
applicable, the broad aim in making termination payments is to 
avoid rewarding poor performance.

Salary and benefits will continue to be paid throughout the notice 
period although the Committee has the discretion to make a 
payment in lieu of notice.

The treatment of payments for the Group Profit Share Scheme 
and the Share Scheme will be in accordance with the relevant 
scheme rules and discretion as set out in those plans at the 
time the Director leaves.

Malus and clawback
Clawback provisions enable variable remuneration to be reclaimed 
under exceptional circumstances, as follows:

•  GPS – malus and clawback provisions are in place in the event 
of adverse restatement of accounts or material misconduct, 
at the discretion of the Remuneration Committee. 

•  Share Options – clawback provisions are in place for all options 

should there be any restatement of accounts or breach of 
contract, at the discretion of the Remuneration Committee.

•  Commission – clawback provisions are in place in the event of 
adverse restatement of accounts or breach of contract for all 
commission payments.

Source and funding of shares
Share awards under the Group Profit Share Scheme are covered 
wherever possible through market purchases by the Company’s 
Employee Benefit Trust (“EBT”) rather than through the issue of 
new shares, and this has been the case since the inception of the 
Scheme in 2007. It remains our intention to continue to operate in 
this manner in order to minimise potential dilution of shareholders’ 
interests. Similarly, options under the Share Scheme are not 
normally satisfied by the issue of new shares, in order to minimise 
potential dilution. The Company provides funds to the EBT to allow 
it to purchase shares in the market with which to satisfy the 
exercise of options. The number of shares purchased by the Group 
to hedge the award of options is based on an appropriate hedge 
ratio at each grant date, as calculated by management and 
approved by the Remuneration Committee.

Record plc Annual Report 2020

75

 Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional informationRemuneration report continued

Remuneration Policy continued
Approach to remuneration for new Executive Directors
On the recruitment of a new Executive Director the level of fixed 
remuneration will be appropriate to the candidate’s skills and 
experience and the responsibility that they will be undertaking. 
New Executive Directors would be eligible to join the Group 
Profit Share Scheme and would be eligible to be considered 
for the Share Scheme as deemed appropriate by the 
Remuneration Committee, subject to the applicable policy 
at the time.

Regulation
We continue to review our Remuneration Policy in line with 
regulatory changes and good practice and to ensure compliance 
with the principles of the Remuneration Code of the UK financial 
services regulator, as applicable to the Group. There is some 
uncertainty ahead arising from new European legislation such as 
the Investment Firm Regulation and Directive and the impact of the 
UK exiting the European Union which may or may not apply to us. 
We may have to revisit our Remuneration Policy once the 
application of these rules has been clarified.

The Remuneration Committee recognises that a new Executive 
Director may forfeit remuneration as a result of leaving a previous 
employer and the Committee will consider mitigating that loss or 
part of that loss by making an award in addition to the 
remuneration outlined above. The Committee will consider any 
relevant factors including any performance conditions attached to 
any previous incentive arrangements and the likelihood of these 
conditions being met and will take reasonable steps to ensure that 
any payment is at an appropriate level.

When recruiting a new Non-executive Director, fees will be in line 
with the prevailing fee schedule paid to other Board members and 
Non-executive Directors at that time.

Remuneration Policy – illustrations
The charts below show the lowest, highest and average 
remuneration for the Executive Directors over the past three-years. 
Fixed remuneration is comprised of salary, pension contributions, 
other benefits and any cash alternative. Variable remuneration 
comprises Group Profit Share, including cash and share payments, 
as well as any gains on share options. As variable remuneration is 
not capped at the individual level, we have used the three-year 
average, highest and lowest remuneration as an indication of the 
Executive Director’s earnings potential. Future remuneration will be 
determined based on profitability and performance as described in 
the Remuneration Policy.

Leslie Hill (appointed CEO 13 February 2020)

James Wood-Collins 
(resigned as CEO on 13 February 2020)

Minimum

100%

£521,901

3-year
low

3-year
high

3-year
average

48%

48%

52%

£690,137

52%

£742,894

47%

53%

£718,557

3-year
low

3-year
high

3-year
average

50%

50%

£582,620

48%

52%

£695,595

48%

52%

£655,745

£

0

100k 200k 300k 400k 500k 600k

700k

800k

900k

1,000k

£

0

100k 200k 300k 400k 500k 600k

700k

800k

900k

1,000k

Bob Noyen

Steve Cullen

Minimum

100%

£331,622

Minimum

100%

£152,055

3-year
low

3-year
high

3-year
average

51%

48%

49%

49%

£656,128

52%

£689,458

51%

£673,569

3-year
low

3-year
high

3-year
average

63%

37%

£235,238

62%

38%

£245,090

63%

37%

£239,924

£

0

100k 200k 300k 400k 500k 600k

700k

800k

900k

1,000k

£

0

100k 200k 300k 400k 500k 600k

700k

800k

900k

1,000k

Key:

 Fixed

 Variable

The above charts exclude the value of options granted to Directors.

76

Record plc Annual Report 2020

Remuneration report continued

Annual report on remuneration
This part of the report has been prepared in accordance with Schedule 8 of the Large and Medium-sized Companies and Groups 
(Accounts and Reports) Regulations 2008 (as amended), and relevant sections of the Listing Rules. The Annual Report on Remuneration 
will be put to an advisory shareholder vote at the 2020 AGM. The information on pages 77 to 85 has been audited, where required, under 
the regulations and is indicated as audited information where applicable.

Directors’ remuneration as a single figure (audited information)
The remuneration of the Directors for the year ended 31 March 2020 is detailed below together with their remuneration for the 
previous year.

Leslie Hill 
(appointed CEO on  
13 February 2020) 

James Wood-Collins 
(resigned as CEO 
on 13 February 2020) 

Bob Noyen 

Steve Cullen

2020 
£ 

2019 
£ 

2020 
£ 

2019 
£ 

2020 
£ 

2019 
£ 

2020 
£ 

2019 
£

306,529 

285,913 

249,096 

285,913 

285,913 

285,913 

129,997 

129,997

2,150 

2,044 

809 

926 

1,393 

1,365 

1,908 

47,512 

44,316 

38,610 

44,316 

44,316 

44,316 

20,150 

1,971

20,150

Executive Directors 

Salaries and fees 

Benefits1  

Pensions2 

Total Fixed Pay 

356,191 

332,273 

288,515 

331,155 

331,622 

331,594 

152,055 

152,118

Short-term incentive  
(GPS cash) 

Short-term incentive  
(GPS shares)3  

257,801 

238,576 

194,669 

238,576 

228,999 

238,576 

58,260 

61,981

Total Variable Pay5 

386,703 

357,864 

292,005 

357,864 

343,500 

357,864 

128,902 

119,288 

97,336 

119,288 

114,501 

119,288 

29,129 

87,389 

30,991

92,972

Total 

742,894 

690,137 

580,520 

689,019 

675,122 

689,458 

239,444 

245,090

Neil Record 

Jane Tufnell 

Rosemary Hilary 

Tim Edwards

Non-executive  
Directors 

2020 
£ 

2019 
£ 

2020 
£ 

2019 
£ 

2020 
£ 

2019 
£ 

2020 
£ 

2019 
£

Salaries and fees 

79,310 

79,310 

63,500 

53,498 

49,862 

49,862 

43,497 

43,497

Benefits1 

Pensions2 

Total 

2,490 

12,293 

94,093 

2,258 

12,293 

93,861 

— 

— 

— 

— 

182 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

—

—

63,500 

53,498 

50,044 

49,862 

43,497 

43,497

1.  This value includes matching shares on SIP scheme, medical benefits, payments made in lieu of medical benefits, overtime payments and reimbursement of 

taxable travel expenses.

2.  This includes payments made in lieu of pension contributions.
3.  Short term incentive payments are subject to individual performance conditions summarised in the objectives table below. The shares vest immediately but are 

subject to lock up restrictions and are calculated based on the overall profitability of the Group.

4.  The Remuneration Committee exercised discretion and James Wood-Collins was determined to be a good leaver for the GPS. GPS relates to the period to 

13 August 2020.

5.  The table excludes any value derived from share options. The only Director who had a gain in the year was James Wood-Collins (£2,100).

Payments for loss of office and payments made to former Directors
James Wood-Collins left the Board of Directors on 13 February 2020 and was placed on garden leave for the duration of his six months’ 
notice period until 13 August 2020. The payment to be made for loss of office of £97,000 will be paid in line with statutory compensation 
requirements and the current Remuneration Policy which contained no post-employment shareholding requirements. James was treated 
as a good leaver under the Group Profit Share Scheme and Share Scheme rules and Remuneration Policy. In addition, the Company paid 
£50,000 towards outplacement support. 

Payments totalling £94,136 were made to James Wood-Collins after 13 February 2020, when he resigned from the Board of Directors. 
These payments comprised £36,816 salary, £119 medical benefits, £34,330 short-term incentive (GPS cash), £17,165 short-term 
incentive (GPS shares) and £5,706 pensions. No other payments were made to former Directors.

Pensions (audited information)
Executive Directors are entitled to join the Group Personal Pension Scheme. This is a defined contribution plan and for the financial year 
ending 31 March 2020, the Group made contributions of 15.5% of each Director’s salary which could either be paid into the Group 
Personal Pension Scheme, taken as cash or a combination of the two. 

All Directors who make personal contributions into the Company pension scheme via salary sacrifice receive an amount equivalent to 
the employer’s national insurance saved by the Company into their pension as an additional contribution.

The employer pension contributions for the financial years ending 31 March 2019 and 31 March 2020 are detailed in the tables above.

Record plc Annual Report 2020

77

 Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional information 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Remuneration report continued

Annual report on remuneration continued
Allocation of the Profit Share pool to Executive Directors
The Remuneration Committee is able to exercise discretion over the level of base Group Profit Share units that are awarded to 
Executive Directors based on the role and level of responsibility. The final allocation is adjusted based on an assessment of individual 
Director’s performance compared to their objectives. On two occasions during the year, the Committee approved awards to the 
Directors after considering the role and performance of each individual Director for the relevant six-month period. The overall 
performance for the year for each Executive Director is summarised below. The Committee also receives reports from the Head of 
Compliance and Risk, regarding any legal or compliance issues relevant to the award.

James Wood-Collins
James Wood-Collins met the majority of his objectives for the year and his GPS award was 100%. He resigned from the Board on 
13 February 2020 and was considered to be a good leaver.

Leslie Hill

Objectives

Outcomes

Strategic
Revenue: At least double-digit annualised percentage revenue growth 
on a constant currency basis. 

Client retention in the face of sustained fee pressure: Retain 90%+ 
of attributable run rate revenue, with attribution to be determined on a 
client-by-client basis.

Revenues have fallen by 1% (based on data as at mid-March 2020 
when objectives were assessed) and this was a 1% increase on an 
unadjusted basis.

For the clients that Leslie was solely or jointly responsible for there was 
a retention rate of 94% of attributable run rate revenue. 

Leveraging client relationships: £2 million annualised revenue, 
in partnership with colleagues.

Increase in annualised revenue from March 2019 to March 2020 
of £1.2 million.

Operational
Compliance: Ensure compliance with policies and procedures, to 
ensure Record meets its obligations to clients and to regulators.

This was achieved.

People
Innovation and new initiatives: Encourage ideas from across the firm, 
ensure each is assessed, support implementation as appropriate – 
includes potential strategic partnerships as well as organic initiatives.

This was achieved with new initiatives being encouraged during the 
year, particularly in technology, with Leslie driving the importance of 
new ideas and products arising from tangible and commercial needs. 

Recruitment: Recruit, develop and retain high performing colleagues 
as part of Record plc leadership and participation.

This was achieved, with the recruitment of a new Head of Sales and 
the development and retention of high performers in the team. 

Award: Stretching targets were set for the year, and while not all targets were fully met, the Committee applied discretion to make an award of 
105% of base units to Leslie Hill to ensure that she was incentivised during the period of leadership change and her promotion to CEO.

78

Record plc Annual Report 2020

 
 
 
Remuneration report continued

Bob Noyen

Objectives

Outcomes

Strategic
Investment products and services: Initiate investment research 
to retain clients, produce new products and services with improved 
success rates. 

Client retention in the face of sustained fee pressure: Retain 90%+ 
of attributable run rate revenue, with attribution to be determined on a 
client-by-client basis.

Enhanced Passive Hedging generated performance fees in the period. 
Investment decisions have added value, as measured by the 
Investment Committee.

For the clients that Bob was solely or jointly responsible for there was a 
retention rate of 100% of attributable run rate revenue. 

Leveraging client relationships: £2 million annualised revenue, 
in partnership with colleagues.

Increase in annualised revenue from March 2019 to March 2020 of 
£1.2 million.

Operational
Compliance: Ensure compliance with policies and procedures, to 
ensure Record meets its obligations to clients and to regulators.

This has been met. 

Resource allocation: Effectively help manage and coordinate research 
resources across fundamental, quantitative and applied research 
teams.

Increased visibility of research activity to senior management and 
rotating chairs of research priorities has helped improve management 
and coordination of research efforts. 

People
Support client and client services teams: Improve engagement on 
client presentations and adherence to deadlines, including in 
collaboration with client teams.

Bob is noted for his creativity, dedication and outstanding client 
commitment. There has been some improvement on working with 
other teams and adherence to deadlines.

Award: Objectives were mostly met for the period and the Committee made an award of 100% of base units, applying discretion to ensure that 
Bob was incentivised during the period of leadership change.

Steve Cullen

Objectives

Outcomes

Strategic
Commercial alignment of Finance team: Identify and implement 
opportunities for Finance team to become more commercial, including 
both greater client alignment, cost savings and productivity 
enhancements. 

Operational
Cost discipline and accountability: Ensure maintenance of cost 
discipline across the business through adherence to approved budget, 
and expenditure authorisation policy and procedures. 

Risk management: Ensure suitable systems and controls in place 
within Finance to minimise potential errors/breaches in Finance.

Reporting: Ensure timely delivery of key reporting metrics, including 
the Annual Report, internal audit relationship, investor relations.

People
External relationships: Continue to develop relationships with external 
auditors, internal auditors. company brokers and investor relations.  

Information: Lead the standardisation and measurement of individual 
objectives and GPS determination. Ensure consistency of approach 
and fairness in the interpretation of employee survey results.

Some progress in this area with the implementation of an automated 
system for debit cards and expense management and increased 
automation of the processes for invoice production.

Cost discipline was maintained throughout the financial year. 

No material errors or breaches in the team. 

Refreshed approach to the Annual Report in 2019 with more 
management meetings earlier and improvements made to the style 
of the report. Closeout meeting identified improvements that will be 
worked on this year.

Relationships improved with internal and external auditors and periodic 
meetings being organised to discuss ongoing issues. Increased 
involvement with brokers and investor relations. 

Objectives for team set and measured.

Award: Objectives were mostly met for the period and the Committee made an award of 97.5% of base units, applying discretion to ensure that 
Steve was incentivised during the period of leadership change.

Record plc Annual Report 2020

79

 Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional information 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Remuneration report continued

Annual report on remuneration continued
Directors’ share options and share awards (audited information)
During the financial year ended 31 March 2020 option awards were made to all the Executive Directors in accordance with the 
scheme rules.

All of the Executive Directors have previously been awarded share options and the table below sets out details of Executive Directors’ 
outstanding share option awards, which may vest on a stepped basis over three, four and five years subject to continued service and 
performance conditions, as well as any options that have lapsed or been exercised.

Total 
options at 
1 April 2019 

Options 
granted 
in period 

Date of grant 

Leslie Hill 

27/11/14 

210,000 

(appointed 
CEO on 
13 February
2020)

01/12/15 

300,000 

27/01/16 

66,667 

30/11/16 

550,000 

26/01/18 

280,000 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

21/08/19 

— 

575,000 

18/11/13 
James 
Wood-Collins   27/11/14 
(resigned 
as
CEO on
13 February
2020)

27/01/16 

01/12/15 

30/11/16 

26/01/18 

116,667 

210,000 

300,000 

66,667 

550,000 

1,300,000 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

21/08/19 

— 

575,000 

Bob Noyen 

27/11/14 

210,000 

01/12/15 

300,000 

27/01/16 

66,667 

30/11/16 

550,000 

26/01/18 

280,000 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

21/08/19 

— 

575,000 

Steve Cullen 

27/11/14 

90,000 

01/12/15 

300,000 

27/01/16 

66,667 

30/11/16 

550,000 

26/01/18 

125,000 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

21/08/19 

— 

260,000 

Options 
lapsed 
in period 

(210,000) 

(150,000) 

(33,333) 

(183,333) 

— 

— 

— 

(210,000) 

(150,000) 

(33,333) 

(183,333) 

— 

— 

(210,000) 

(150,000) 

(33,333) 

(183,333) 

— 

— 

(90,000) 

(150,000) 

(33,334) 

(183,333) 

— 

— 

Options 
exercised 
in period 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

(116,667) 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

Total  
options at 
31 March 
2020 

— 

Exercise 
price 

35.86p 

Earliest 
exercise 

n/a 

Latest  

exercise

n/a

150,000 

28.875p 

01/12/20 

30/11/21

33,334 

24.50p 

27/01/20 

26/01/22

366,667 

34.0718p 

30/11/19 

29/11/22

280,000 

575,000 

43.50p 

26/01/21 

25/01/24

31.10p 

21/08/22 

20/08/25

— 

— 

30.00p 

35.86p 

n/a 

n/a 

n/a

n/a

150,000 

28.875p 

01/12/20 

30/11/21

33,334 

24.50p 

27/01/20 

26/01/22

366,667 

34.0718p 

30/11/19 

29/11/22

1,300,000 

43.50p 

26/01/21 

25/01/24

575,000 

31.10p 

21/08/22 

20/08/25

— 

35.86p 

n/a 

n/a

150,000 

28.875p 

01/12/20 

30/11/21

33,334 

24.50p 

27/01/20 

26/01/22

366,667 

34.0718p 

30/11/19 

29/11/22

280,000 

575,000 

43.50p 

26/01/21 

25/01/24

31.10p 

21/08/22 

20/08/25

— 

35.86p 

n/a 

n/a

150,000 

28.875p 

01/12/20 

30/11/21

33,333 

24.50p 

27/01/20 

26/01/22

366,667 

34.0718p 

30/11/19 

29/11/22

125,000 

260,000 

43.50p 

26/01/21 

25/01/24

31.10p 

21/08/22 

20/08/25

The outstanding share options above vest subject to performance conditions which are detailed below.

James Wood-Collins had a gain on share options of £2,100 in the year ended 31 March 2020. No other Directors had gains on 
share options.

There were no gains on share options by Directors in the year ended 31 March 2019.

Vesting of awards made to Executive Directors is on a stepped basis and is linked to Record’s average annualised EPS growth over the 
relevant period since grant as follows:

Record’s annualised EPS growth over the period from grant to vesting 

Percentage of shares subject to the award which vest

>RPI growth + 13% 

>RPI growth + 10%, =RPI growth + 7%, =RPI growth + 4%, = 3 months 

Cash and cash equivalents  

Total current assets 

Total assets 

Current liabilities 

Trade and other payables   

Corporation tax liabilities 

Lease liabilities 

Financial liabilities 

Derivative financial liabilities  

Total current liabilities 

Non‑current liabilities

Deferred tax liabilities 

Provisions 

Lease liabilities 

Total non‑current liabilities 

Total net assets 

Equity 

Issued share capital 

Share premium account 

Capital redemption reserve  

Retained earnings 

Equity attributable to owners of the parent  

Non-controlling interests 

Total equity 

Approved by the Board on 18 June 2020 and signed on its behalf by:

Neil Record 
Chairman 

Steve Cullen
Chief Financial Officer

Company registered number: 1927640

The notes on pages 103 to 130 are an integral part of these consolidated financial statements.

Note 

11 

12 

13 

14 

16 

17 

18 

18 

19 

19 

12 

20 

17 

15 

12 

21 

2020 
£’000 

470 

1,175 

751 

2,472 

4,868 

8,704 

193 

7,958 

14,294 

31,149 

36,017 

2019 
£’000

288

—

761

1,112

2,161

7,562

164

10,735

12,966

31,427

33,588

(3,009) 

(2,736)

(601) 

(544) 

(692)

—

(2,191) 

(2,621)

(610) 

(109)

(6,955) 

(6,158)

(86) 

(200) 

(615) 

(901) 

(29)

—

—

(29)

28,161 

27,401

50 

2,259 

26 

25,694 

28,029 

132 

50

2,243

26

25,022

27,341

60

28,161 

27,401

Record plc Annual Report 2020

97

Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional information 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Consolidated statement of changes in equity

Year ended 31 March 2020

Called-up 
share capital 
£’000 

Note 

As at 1 April 2019 

IFRS 16 opening adjustment 

Profit and total comprehensive  
income for the year 

Dividends paid 

Issue of shares in subsidiary 

Own shares acquired by EBT 

Release of shares held by EBT 

1 

9 

Share-based payment reserve movement  

Transactions with shareholders 

As at 31 March 2020 

Year ended 31 March 2019 

50 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

50 

Called-up 
share capital 
£’000 

Note 

As at 1 April 2018 

Profit and total comprehensive  
income for the year 

Dividends paid 

9 

Issue of shares in subsidiary 

Own shares acquired by EBT 

Release of shares held by EBT 

Share-based payment reserve movement  

Transactions with shareholders 

As at 31 March 2019 

50 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

50 

Capital 
redemption 
reserve 
£’000 

Retained 
earnings 
£’000 

Equity 
attributable 
to equity  
holders of  
the parent 
£’000 

Non- 
controlling 
interests 
£’000 

26 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

26 

25,022 

27,341 

(98) 

(98) 

6,420 

(5,888) 

— 

6,420 

(5,888) 

—  

(1,020) 

(1,020) 

971 

287 

987 

287 

(5,650) 

(5,634) 

25,694 

28,029 

60 

— 

(48) 

— 

120 

— 

— 

— 

120 

132 

Capital 
redemption 
reserve 
£’000 

Retained 
earnings 
£’000 

Equity 
attributable 
to equity  
holders of  
the parent 
£’000 

Non- 
controlling 
interests 
£’000 

26 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

26 

24,238 

26,551 

6,430 

(5,517) 

— 

(893) 

677 

87 

6,430 

(5,517) 

— 

(893) 

683 

87 

(5,646) 

(5,640) 

25,022 

27,341 

— 

— 

— 

60 

— 

— 

— 

60 

60 

Share 
premium 
account 
£’000 

2,243 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

16 

— 

16 

2,259 

Share 
premium 
account 
£’000 

2,237 

— 

— 

— 

— 

6 

— 

6 

2,243 

Total 
equity 
£’000

27,401

(98)

6,372

(5,888)

120

(1,020)

987

287

(5,514)

28,161

Total 
equity 
£’000

26,551

6,430

(5,517)

60

(893)

683

87

(5,580)

27,401

The notes on pages 103 to 130 are an integral part of these consolidated financial statements.

98

Record plc Annual Report 2020

 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Consolidated statement of cash flows
Year ended 31 March

Net cash inflow from operating activities 

Cash flow from investing activities 

Purchase of intangible software 

Purchase of property, plant and equipment 

Purchase of securities 

Sale/(purchase) of money market instruments with maturity > 3 months  

Interest received 

Net cash inflow/(outflow) from investing activities 

Cash flow from financing activities 

Lease repayments 

Subscription for shares in subsidiary 

Purchase of own shares 

Dividends paid to equity shareholders 

Cash outflow from financing activities   

Net increase in cash and cash equivalents in the year  

Effect of exchange rate changes 

Cash and cash equivalents at the beginning of the year 

Cash and cash equivalents at the end of the year 

Closing cash and cash equivalents consist of: 

Cash 

Cash equivalents 

Cash and cash equivalents 

The notes on pages 103 to 130 are an integral part of these consolidated financial statements.

Note 

25 

9 

2020 
£’000 

6,543 

(311) 

(243) 

(1,113) 

2,777 

160 

1,270 

(576) 

120 

(487) 

(5,888) 

(6,831) 

982 

346 

12,966 

14,294 

8,004 

6,290 

18 

14,294 

2019 
£’000

7,026

(134)

(72)

—

(537)

110

(633)

—

40

(653)

(5,517)

(6,130)

263

205

12,498

12,966

2,150

10,816

12,966

Record plc Annual Report 2020

99

Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional information 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Company statement of financial position
As at 31 March

Non‑current assets 

Right-of-use assets 

Investments 

Total non‑current assets   

Current assets 

Trade and other receivables 

Cash and cash equivalents  

Total current assets 

Total assets 

Current liabilities 

Trade and other payables   

Corporation tax liabilities 

Lease liabilities 

Total current liabilities 

Non‑current liabilities

Lease liabilities 

Provisions 

Total non‑current liabilities 

Total net assets 

Equity 

Issued share capital 

Share premium account 

Capital redemption reserve  

Retained earnings 

Total equity 

Note 

12 

14 

18 

19 

19 

21 

2020 
£’000 

1,096 

3,516 

4,612 

142 

2,241 

2,383 

6,995 

(10) 

(2) 

(495) 

(507) 

(584) 

(200) 

(784) 

2019 
£’000

—

5,567

5,567

—

3

3

5,570

(55)

(14)

—

(69)

—

—

—

5,704 

5,501

50 

1,809 

26 

3,819 

5,704 

50

1,809

26

3,616

5,501

The Company’s total comprehensive income for the year (which is principally derived from intra-group dividends) was £6,098,249 
(2019: £6,681,076).

Approved by the Board on 18 June 2020 and signed on its behalf by:

Neil Record 
Chairman 

Steve Cullen
Chief Financial Officer

Company registered number: 1927640

The notes on pages 103 to 130 are an integral part of these consolidated financial statements.

100

Record plc Annual Report 2020

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Company statement of changes in equity

Year ended 31 March 2020

As at 1 April 2019 

IFRS 16 opening adjustment 

Profit and total comprehensive income for the year 

Dividends paid 

Share option reserve movement 

Transactions with shareholders 

As at 31 March 2020 

Year ended 31 March 2019

As at 1 April 2018 

Profit and total comprehensive income for the year 

Dividends paid 

Share option reserve movement 

Transactions with shareholders 

As at 31 March 2019 

Note 

9 

Note 

9 

Called-up 
share 
capital 
£’000 

50 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

50 

Called-up 
share 
capital 
£’000 

50 

— 

— 

— 

— 

50 

Share 
premium  
account 
£’000 

1,809 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

1,809 

Share  
premium 
account 
£’000 

1,809 

— 

— 

— 

— 

1,809 

Capital  
redemption 
reserve 
£’000 

Retained 
earnings 
£’000 

Total 
shareholders’ 
equity 
£’000

26 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

26 

3,616 

(91) 

6,098 

(5,888) 

84 

(5,804) 

3,819 

5,501

(91)

6,098

(5,888)

84

(5,804)

5,704

Capital 
redemption  
reserve 
£’000 

26 

— 

— 

— 

— 

26 

Retained 
earnings 
£’000 

2,312 

6,681 

Total 
shareholders’ 
equity 
£’000

4,197

6,681

(5,517) 

(5,517)

140 

(5,377) 

3,616 

140

(5,377)

5,501

The notes on pages 103 to 130 are an integral part of these consolidated financial statements.

Record plc Annual Report 2020

101

Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional information 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Company statement of cash flows
Year ended 31 March

Net cash inflow/(outflow) from operating activities 

Cash flow from investing activities 

Dividends received 

Investment in subsidiaries   

Redemption of seed funds  

Interest received 

Net cash inflow from investing activities 

Cash flow from financing activities 

Lease repayments 

Dividends paid to equity shareholders 

Cash outflow from financing activities   

Net increase in cash and cash equivalents in the year 

FX revaluation 

Cash and cash equivalents at the beginning of the year 

Cash and cash equivalents at the end of the year 

Closing cash and cash equivalents consist of: 

Cash 

Cash equivalents 

Cash and cash equivalents 

The notes on pages 103 to 130 are an integral part of these consolidated financial statements.

Note 

25 

2020 
£’000 

452 

2019 
£’000

(1,043)

6,030 

6,600

(80) 

2,247 

2 

(40)

—

1

8,199 

6,561

9 

(517) 

(5,888) 

(6,405) 

2,246 

(8) 

3 

2,241 

2,241 

— 

18 

2,241 

—

(5,517)

(5,517)

1

—

2

3

3

—

3

102

Record plc Annual Report 2020

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the financial statements
For the year ended 31 March 2020

These financial statements exclude disclosures that are both immaterial and judged to be unnecessary to understand our results and financial position.

1. Accounting policies
In order to provide more clarity to the notes to the financial statements, accounting policy descriptions appear at the beginning of the note 
to which they relate, and are shown in blue text.

The principal accounting policies adopted in the preparation of these consolidated financial statements are set out in the notes below. 
These policies have been consistently applied to all periods presented unless otherwise stated.

a. Accounting convention
Basis of preparation
The Group and Company have prepared their financial statements under International Financial Reporting Standards (“IFRSs”) as adopted by the 
European Union. IFRSs comprise standards and interpretations approved by the International Accounting Standards Board (“IASB”) and the IFRS 
Interpretations Committee (“IFRS IC”) as adopted in the European Union as at 31 March 2020. The financial statements have been prepared on a 
historical cost basis, modified to include fair valuation of derivative financial instruments.

The Directors are satisfied that the Company and the Group have adequate resources with which to continue to operate for the foreseeable future. 
In arriving at this conclusion, the Directors have considered in detail the impact of the covid-19 pandemic on the Group, the market it operates in 
and its stakeholders. For this reason the financial statements have been prepared on a going concern basis. Please refer to the Directors’ report 
on page 88 for more detail on going concern, and also see management’s detailed review of the impact of covid-19 on page 40. 

The preparation of financial statements in accordance with the recognition and measurement principles set out in IFRSs requires management to 
make judgements, estimates and assumptions that affect the application of policies and reported amounts of assets and liabilities, income and 
expenses. The bases for management judgements, estimates and assumptions are discussed further in note 2.

Impact of new accounting standards
The Group has applied the following standards and amendments for the first time for their annual reporting period commencing 1 April 2019:

• 

IFRS 16 “Leases”

•  Prepayment Features with Negative Compensation – Amendments to IFRS 9

•  Long-term Interests in Associates and Joint Ventures – Amendments to IAS 28

•  Annual Improvements to IFRS Standards 2015 – 2017 Cycle

•  Plan Amendment, Curtailment or Settlement – Amendments to IAS 19

• 

Interpretation 23 Uncertainty over Income Tax Treatments.

The Group had to change its accounting policies as a result of adopting IFRS 16.

The impact of the adoption of the leasing standard, IFRS 16 – “Leases”, and the new accounting policy are disclosed below with further detail 
provided in note 12. The other amendments to standards did not have any impact on the Group’s accounting policies and did not require 
retrospective adjustments and are not expected to significantly affect the current or future periods.

IFRS 16 – “Leases”
IFRS 16 – “Leases” is effective for annual periods beginning on or after 1 January 2019 and replaces IAS 17 – “Leases” and related interpretations. 
This introduces a comprehensive model for the identification of lease arrangements and accounting treatment for both lessors and lessees, which 
distinguishes leases and service contracts on the basis of whether an identified asset is controlled by a customer. IFRS 16 requires operating 
leases, where the Group is the lessee, to be included on the Group’s statement of financial position, recognising a right-of-use (“ROU”) asset and 
a related lease liability representing the present value obligation to make lease payments. The ROU asset is assessed for impairment annually 
(incorporating any onerous lease assessments) and depreciated on a straight-line basis, adjusted for any re-measurements of the lease liability. 
The lease liability will subsequently be adjusted for lease payments and interest, as well as the impact of any lease modifications. IFRS 16 also 
requires extensive disclosures detailing the impact of leases on the Group’s financial position and results.

The Group has elected to recognise the cumulative effect of initially applying the standard to its leases retrospectively on the date of initial 
application (1 April 2019), and has not restated comparative information. The cumulative effect of initially applying this Standard results in an 
adjustment to the opening balance of retained earnings on the date of initial application.

On adoption of IFRS 16, the Group recognised lease liabilities in relation to leases which had previously been classified as “operating leases” 
under the principles of IAS 17 – “Leases”. These liabilities were measured at the present value of the remaining lease payments, discounted using 
the Group’s assumed incremental borrowing rate as of 1 April 2019. The assumed weighted average incremental borrowing rate applied to the 
lease liabilities on 1 April 2019 was 4%.

The Group had three lease agreements relating to its premises in Windsor, New York and Zürich respectively, which were previously recognised 
as operating leases.

For each lease, a right-of-use asset has been recognised at its carrying amount as if the standard had been applied since the commencement 
date of each lease.

There were no onerous lease contracts that would have required an adjustment to the right-of-use assets at the date of initial application.

Full disclosure on leases is provided in note 12. 

Record plc Annual Report 2020

103

Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional informationNotes to the financial statements continued
For the year ended 31 March 2020

1. Accounting policies continued
a. Accounting convention continued
Impact of new accounting standards continued
IFRS 16 – “Leases” continued
The change in accounting policy affected the following items in the balance sheet on 1 April 2019:

• 

• 

right-of-use assets – increase by £1,560,371; 

lease liabilities – increase by £1,672,994;

•  prepayments – reduce by £129,401; and

•  accruals – reduce by £144,527.

The net impact on retained earnings on 1 April 2019 was a decrease of £97,497 after adjusting prepayments and accrual balances pertaining to 
the leases which were recognised under the previous accounting policy.

The decrease in retained earnings will be offset over time by a lower annual Group income statement charge, as the total charge over the life of 
each lease is the same as under the previous IAS 17 requirements.

Earnings per share increased by 0.01 pence per share for the year ended 31 March 2020 as a result of the adoption of IFRS 16.

There has been no other new or amended standard adopted in the financial year beginning 1 April 2019 which had a material impact on the 
Group or Company.

Future accounting developments
The Group did not implement the requirements of any other standards or interpretations that were in issue but were not required to be adopted 
by the Group at the year end date. No other standards or interpretations have been issued that are expected to have a material impact on the 
Group’s financial statements.

b. Basis of consolidation
The consolidated financial information contained within the financial statements incorporates financial statements of the Company and its 
subsidiaries drawn up to 31 March 2020. Subsidiaries are entities controlled by the Company and are included from the date that control 
commences until the date that control ceases. Control is achieved where the Company is exposed to or has rights over variable returns from 
its involvement with the entity and it has the power to affect returns. 

An Employee Benefit Trust has been established for the purposes of satisfying certain share-based awards. As the Group has “de facto” control 
over this special purpose entity, the trust is fully consolidated within the financial statements.

At the end of the financial year, the Group held investments in two seed funds. These funds are held by Record plc and represent seed capital 
investments by the Group. 

Significant judgement 
The Group uses judgement to determine whether investments in its seed funds constitute controlling interests in accordance with IFRS 10 
– “Consolidated Financial Statements”. The Group considers all relevant facts and circumstances in assessing whether it has control over 
specific funds or other entities. This includes consideration of the extent of the Group’s exposure to variability of returns as an investor and the 
Group’s ability to direct the relevant activities, through exercising its voting rights as an investor, or as investment manager. We consider that 
the Group exerts such control in cases where (either in isolation or together with its related parties) it holds a majority of units in the fund.

If the Group is in a position to be able to control a fund, then the fund is consolidated within the Group financial statements. Such funds are 
consolidated either on a line-by-line basis, or if the fund meets the definition of a disposal group held for sale it is classified and accounted for on 
that basis. In the case that the Group does not control a fund for the complete reporting period, then the fund is consolidated only for the part of 
the reporting period for which the Group has control over the entity.

Where the Group controls an entity, but does not own all the share capital of that entity, the interest of the other shareholders’ non-controlling 
interests is stated within equity at the non-controlling interests’ proportion of the fair value of the recognised assets and liabilities. In the case of the 
funds controlled by the Group, the interests of any external investors in such funds are recognised as a financial liability as investments in the fund 
are not considered to be equity instruments.

The financial statements of subsidiary undertakings, which are prepared using uniform accounting policies, are coterminous with those of the 
Company apart from those of the seed funds which have accounting reference dates of 30 September. The consolidated financial statements 
incorporate the financial performance of the seed funds in the year ended 31 March 2020 and the financial position of the seed funds as at 
31 March 2020.

The Company is taking advantage of the exemption under the Companies Act 2006 s408(1) not to present its individual statement of 
comprehensive income and related notes that form part of the financial statements. The Group’s total comprehensive income for the year includes 
a profit of £6,098,249 attributable to the Company (2019: £6,681,076).

All intra-Group transactions, balances, income, expenses and dividends are eliminated on consolidation.

c. Foreign currencies
The financial statements are presented in sterling (£), which is the functional currency of the parent company. Foreign currency transactions are 
translated into the functional currency of the parent company using prevailing exchange rates which are updated on a monthly basis. Foreign 
exchange gains and losses resulting from the settlement of such transactions and from the re-measurement of monetary items at year-end 
exchange rates are recognised in the statement of comprehensive income under “other income or expense”.

104

Record plc Annual Report 2020

d. Administrative expenses
Administrative expense includes staff costs, marketing and IT costs, which are recognised on an accruals basis as services are provided 
to the Group.

e. Financial instruments
Financial assets and financial liabilities are recognised when the Group becomes a party to the contractual provisions of the financial instrument. 
Financial assets are derecognised when the contractual rights to the cash flows from the financial assets expire, or when the financial asset and 
all substantial risks and rewards are transferred. A financial liability is derecognised when it is extinguished, discharged, cancelled or expires.

f. Impairment of assets
The Group assesses whether there is any indication that any of its assets have been impaired at least annually. If such an indication exists, 
the asset’s recoverable amount is estimated and compared to its carrying value.

An impairment loss is recognised for the amount by which the asset’s carrying amount exceeds its recoverable amount. Impairment losses 
are recognised in profit or loss.

g. Provisions and contingent liabilities
Provisions are recognised when present obligations as a result of a past event will probably lead to an outflow of economic resources from the 
Group and amounts can be estimated reliably. Timing or amount of the outflow may still be uncertain. A present obligation arises from the 
presence of a legal or constructive commitment that has resulted from past events.

Provisions are measured at the estimated expenditure required to settle the present obligation, based on the most reliable evidence available at 
the reporting date, including the risks and uncertainties associated with the present obligation. Provisions are discounted to their present values, 
where the time value of money is material. Any reimbursement that the Group can be virtually certain to collect from a third party with respect to 
the obligation is recognised as a separate asset. However, this asset may not exceed the amount of the related provision.

All provisions are reviewed at each reporting date and adjusted to reflect the current best estimate. In those cases where the possible outflow of 
economic resources as a result of present obligations is considered improbable or remote, no liability is recognised.

h. Equity
Share capital represents the nominal (par) value of shares that have been issued. Share premium includes any premium received on issue of share 
capital. From time to time, the Group has bought in ordinary shares for cancellation. The cost of the buy-ins was taken directly to retained 
earnings. The nominal value of the shares was taken to a capital redemption reserve. Retained earnings includes all current and prior period 
retained profits and share-based employee remuneration. All transactions with owners of the parent are recorded separately within equity.

2. Critical accounting estimates and judgements
In order to prepare the financial statements in accordance with IFRS, management make certain critical accounting estimates. Management are 
also required to exercise judgement in the process of applying the Group’s accounting policies and in determining the reported amount of certain 
assets and liabilities.

The estimates and associated assumptions are based on historical experience and various other factors including expectations of future events 
that are believed to be reasonable under the circumstances, the results of which form the basis of making the judgements about carrying values 
of assets and liabilities that are not readily apparent from other sources. As a consequence actual results may differ from these estimates. 
The estimates and underlying assumptions are reviewed on an ongoing basis. Revisions to accounting estimates are recognised in the period 
in which the estimate is revised if the revision affects only that period, or in the period of the revision and future periods if the revision affects both 
current and future periods. 

Areas of significant judgement – consolidation of seed funds
Note 1b describes the basis which the Group uses to determine whether it controls seed funds; further detail on consolidation of seed funds is 
provided in note 14.

Sources of estimation uncertainty
Management recognise that the use of estimates is important in calculating both the fair value of share options offered by the Group to its 
employees (see note 22) and deferred tax (see note 15), however the sources of estimation uncertainty do not present a significant risk of material 
adjustment to the carrying amounts of assets or liabilities within the next financial year in either case.

Calculation of leased assets and liabilities requires the use of both estimation and judgement. The identification of an appropriate discount rate 
to use in the calculation of the lease liability involves both estimation and judgement. Where the lease’s implicit rate is not readily determinable, 
an incremental borrowing rate must be calculated by the Group. The discount rate used has a direct effect on the size of the lease liability 
capitalised and although this has been included as an area where the use of estimation and judgement in note 12 is important, it is unlikely 
to materially impact the Group.

3. Segmental analysis
The Directors, who together are the entity’s Chief Operating Decision Maker, consider that its services comprise one operating segment 
(being the provision of currency management services) and that it operates in a market that is not bound by geographical constraints. 
The Group provides Directors with revenue information disaggregated by product, whilst operating costs, assets and liabilities are presented 
on an aggregated basis. This reflects the unified basis on which the products are marketed, delivered and supported. Further information on 
the Group’s operations and principal activities is provided in the Business model section on page 10. Revenue analysed by product is provided 
in note 4.

Record plc Annual Report 2020

105

Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional information 
 
Notes to the financial statements continued
For the year ended 31 March 2020

4. Revenue
Revenue recognition
Revenue comprises the fair value of the consideration received or receivable for the provision of currency management services. Our revenues 
typically arise from charging management fees or performance fees and both are accounted for in accordance with IFRS 15 – “Revenue from 
contracts with customers”. 

Management fees are recorded on a monthly basis as the underlying currency management service occurs; there are no other performance 
obligations (excluding standard duty of care requirements). Management fees are calculated as an agreed percentage of the Assets Under 
Management Equivalents (“AUME”) denominated in the client’s chosen base currency. The percentage varies depending on the nature of services 
and the level of AUME. Management fees are typically invoiced to the customer quarterly with receivables recognised for unpaid invoices.

The Group is entitled to earn performance fees from some clients where the performance of the clients’ mandates exceeds defined benchmarks 
over a set time period, and are recognised when the fee amount can be estimated reliably and it is highly probable that it will not be subject to 
significant reversal.

Performance fee revenues are not considered to be highly probable until the end of a contractual performance period and therefore are not 
recognised until they crystallise, at which time they are payable by the client and cannot be clawed back. There are no other performance 
obligations or services provided which suggest these have been earned either before or after crystallisation date.

a. Revenue from contracts with customers
The following table provides a breakdown of revenue from contracts with customers, with management fees analysed by product. Other currency 
services income includes fees from signal hedging and fiduciary execution.

Revenue by product type 

Management fees 

Passive Hedging 

Dynamic Hedging 

Currency for Return 

Multi-Product 

Total management fee income 

Performance fee income 

Other currency services income 

Total revenue from contracts with customers 

2020 
£’000 

2019 
£’000

12,026 

11,610

3,995 

1,982 

5,130 

4,598

1,775

4,325

23,133 

22,308

1,819 

611 

2,333

332

25,563 

24,973

b. Contract receivables
The payment terms for invoiced revenue vary but are typically 30 days from receipt of invoice. Accrued income is recognised to account for 
income earned but not yet invoiced. Accrued income is the only component of contract assets.

The Group has recognised the following receivables, assets and liabilities in relation to contracts with customers.

Amount receivable from contracts with customers 

Accrued income from contracts with customers 

Total contract receivables and assets 

The ageing of contract receivables is provided in note 23.

There are no contract liabilities arising in relation to contracts with customers.

2020 
£’000 

5,192 

2,264 

7,456 

2019 
£’000

4,654

1,888

6,542

c. Geographical analysis
The geographical analysis of revenue is based on the destination i.e. the location of the client to whom the services are provided. All turnover 
originated in the UK.

Revenue by geographical region 

Management and performance fee income 

UK 

US 

Switzerland 

Other 

Total revenue 

106

2020 
£’000 

2019 
£’000

2,328 

6,209 

11,377 

5,649 

25,563 

2,239

6,439

11,401

4,894

24,973

Record plc Annual Report 2020

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
d. Major clients
During the year ended 31 March 2020, three clients individually accounted for more than 10% of the Group’s revenue. The three largest clients 
generated revenues of £3.9 million, £3.5 million and £3.1 million in the year (2019: three largest clients generated revenues of £4.4 million, 
£3.9 million and £3.6 million in the year).

5. Operating profit
Operating profit for the year is stated after charging/(crediting):

Staff costs 

Depreciation of property, plant and equipment 

Depreciation of leased property 

Operating lease rentals: land and buildings 

Amortisation of intangibles  

Auditor fees 

Fees payable to the Group’s auditor for the audit of the Company’s annual accounts 

Fees payable to the Group’s auditor for the audit of subsidiary undertakings 

Fees payable to the Group’s auditor for the audit of consolidated funds 

Auditor fees total 

Fees payable to the Group’s auditor and its associates for other services: 

Audit-related assurance services required by law or regulation 

Other non-audit services 

Loss on forward FX contracts held to hedge cash flow 

Loss on derivative financial instruments held by seed funds 

Exchange (gains)/losses on revaluation of external holding in seed funds  

Other exchange (gains)/losses 

6. Staff costs
The average number of employees, including Directors, employed by the Group during the year was:

Corporate 

Client relationships 

Investment research 

Operations 

Risk management 

Support 

Annual average 

The aggregate costs of the above employees, including Directors, were as follows:

Wages and salaries 

Social security costs 

Pension costs 

Other employment benefit costs 

Aggregate staff costs 

2020 
£’000 

2019 
£’000

12,087 

11,574

253 

504 

— 

129 

64 

53 

43 

160 

33 

— 

509 

323 

(115) 

(515) 

221

—

604

74

49

42

40

131

27

61

242

—

(67)

(178)

2020 

2019

8 

16 

16 

24 

5 

13 

82 

2020 
£’000 

9,356 

1,278 

514 

939 

9

16

15

26

5

14

85

2019 
£’000

8,900

1,239

468

967

12,087 

11,574

Other employment benefit costs include share-based payments, share option costs, and costs relating to the Record plc Share Incentive Plan. 
Detail on payments made to Directors for loss of office are provided on page 77.

Record plc Annual Report 2020

107

Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional information 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the financial statements continued
For the year ended 31 March 2020

7. Taxation – Group
Current tax is the tax currently payable based on taxable profit for the year. Current income tax assets and/or liabilities comprise those obligations 
to, or claims from, fiscal authorities relating to the current or prior reporting periods that are unpaid at the reporting date. Current tax is payable on 
taxable profit, which differs from profit or loss in the financial statements. Calculation of current tax is based on tax rates and tax laws that have 
been enacted or substantively enacted by the end of the reporting period.

The total charge for the year can be reconciled to the accounting profit as follows:

Profit before taxation 

Taxation at the standard rate of tax in the UK of 19% (2019: 19%) 

Tax effects of: 

Other disallowable expenses and non-taxable income 

Capital allowances for the year higher than depreciation   

Higher tax rates on subsidiary undertakings 

Adjustments recognised in current year in relation to the current tax of prior years 

Adjustments recognised in current year in relation to Research and Development claims in respect of prior years 

Other temporary differences 

Total tax expense 

The tax expense comprises: 

Current tax expense 

Deferred tax expense 

Total tax expense 

2020 
£’000 

7,737 

1,470 

4 

(51) 

17 

— 

(143) 

68 

2019 
£’000

7,989

1,518

16

(20)

10

2

(93)

126

1,365 

1,559

1,309 

56 

1,365 

1,445

114

1,559

The standard rate of UK corporation tax for the year is 19% (2019: 19%). A full corporation tax computation is prepared at the year end. 
The actual charge as a percentage of the profit before tax may differ from the underlying tax rate. Differences typically arise as a result of capital 
allowances differing from depreciation charged, and certain types of expenditure not being deductible for tax purposes. Other differences may 
also arise.

The tax charge for the year ended 31 March 2020 was 17.6% of profit before tax (2019: 19.5%).

8. Earnings per share
Basic earnings per share is calculated by dividing the profit for the financial year attributable to equity holders of the parent by the weighted 
average number of ordinary shares in issue during the year.

Diluted earnings per share is calculated as for the basic earnings per share with a further adjustment to the weighted average number of ordinary 
shares to reflect the effects of all potential dilution.

There is no difference between the profit for the financial year attributable to equity holders of the parent used in the basic and diluted earnings per 
share calculations.

Weighted average number of shares used in calculation of basic earnings per share 

Effect of potential dilutive ordinary shares – share options  

Weighted average number of shares used in calculation of diluted earnings per share 

Basic earnings per share 

Diluted earnings per share   

2020 

2019

  196,679,874  196,655,224

390,156 

1,462,554

  197,070,030  198,117,778

pence 

3.26 

3.26 

pence

3.27

3.25

The potential dilutive shares relate to the share options granted in respect of the Group’s Share Scheme (see note 22). There were share options 
in place at the beginning of the year over 12,291,703 shares. During the year 1,691,068 share options were exercised, and a further 
2,640,120 share options lapsed or were forfeited. The Group granted 3,935,000 share options with a potentially dilutive effect during the year. 
Of the 11,895,515 share options in place at the end of the period, 5,913,648 have a dilutive impact at the year end.

108

Record plc Annual Report 2020

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
9. Dividends
Interim and special dividends are recognised when paid and final dividends when approved by shareholders.

The dividends paid by the Group during the year ended 31 March 2020 totalled £5,887,541 (2.99 pence per share) which comprised a final 
dividend in respect of the year ended 31 March 2019 of £2,261,970 (1.15 pence per share), a special dividend in respect of the year ended 
31 March 2019 of £1,357,182 (0.69 pence per share) and an interim dividend for the year ended 31 March 2020 of £2,268,389  
(1.15 pence per share).

The dividends paid by the Group during the year ended 31 March 2019 totalled £5,516,896 (2.80 pence per share) which comprised a final 
dividend in respect of the year ended 31 March 2018 of £2,266,379 (1.15 pence per share), a special dividend in respect of the year ended 
31 March 2018 of £985,382 (0.50 pence per share) and an interim dividend for the year ended 31 March 2019 of £2,265,135 (1.15 pence 
per share). 

For the year ended 31 March 2020, a final ordinary dividend of 1.15 pence per share has been proposed and a special dividend of 0.41 pence 
per share has been declared, totalling £2.3 million and £0.8 million respectively.

10. Retirement benefit obligations
The Group operates defined contribution pension plans for the benefit of employees. The Group makes contributions to independently 
administered plans, such contributions being recognised as an expense when they fall due. The assets of the schemes are held separately from 
those of the Group in independently administered funds.

The Group is not exposed to the particular risks associated with the operation of Defined Benefit plans and has no legal or constructive obligation 
to make any further payments to the plans other than the contributions due.

The pension cost charge disclosed in note 6 to the accounts represents contributions payable by the Group to the funds.

11. Intangible assets
Intangible assets are shown at historical cost less accumulated amortisation and impairment losses. Amortisation is charged to profit or loss on a 
straight-line basis over the estimated useful lives of the intangible assets unless such lives are indefinite. Amortisation is included within operating 
expenses in the statement of comprehensive income. Intangible assets are amortised from the date they are available for use. Useful lives are as 
follows:

•  Software – 2 to 5 years

Amortisation periods and methods are reviewed annually and adjusted if appropriate.

The Group’s intangible assets comprise both purchased software and the capitalised cost of software deployment. No internal costs of software 
development are capitalised. The carrying amounts can be analysed as follows:

2020 

Cost 

At 1 April 2019 

Additions 

Disposals 

At 31 March 2020 

Amortisation 

At 1 April 2019 

Charge for the year 

Disposals 

At 31 March 2020 

Net book amounts 

At 31 March 2020 

At 1 April 2019 

Software 
£’000 

Total 
£’000

1,592 

1,592

311 

— 

311

—

1,903 

1,903

1,304 

1,304

129 

— 

129

—

1,433 

1,433

470 

288 

470

288

Record plc Annual Report 2020

109

Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional information 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the financial statements continued
For the year ended 31 March 2020

11. Intangible assets continued

2019 

Cost 

At 1 April 2018 

Additions 

Disposals 

At 31 March 2019 

Amortisation 

At 1 April 2018 

Charge for the year 

Disposals 

At 31 March 2019 

Net book amounts 

At 31 March 2019 

At 1 April 2018 

Software 
£’000 

Total 
£’000

1,458 

1,458

134 

— 

134

—

1,592 

1,592

1,230 

1,230

74 

— 

74

—

1,304 

1,304

288 

228 

288

228

The annual contractual commitment for the maintenance and support of the above software is £187,454, (2019: £183,976). All amortisation 
charges are included within administrative expenses.

12. Leases
The Group’s lease arrangements consist of business premises property leases. Rental contracts are typically made for fixed periods of three to 
six years but they may have extension options. Lease terms are negotiated on an individual basis and contain a wide range of different terms 
and conditions. The lease agreements do not impose any covenants, but leased assets cannot be used as security for borrowing purposes.

Until the financial year ended 31 March 2019, these leases met the criteria to be classified as operating leases. Payments made under operating 
leases (net of any incentives received from the lessor) were charged to profit or loss on a straight-line basis over the period of the lease.

From 1 April 2019, following the adoption of IFRS 16 as described in note 1, leases have been recognised as a right-of-use asset and a 
corresponding liability at the date at which the leased asset is available for use by the Group. Each lease payment is allocated between the liability 
and finance cost. The finance cost is charged to profit or loss over the lease period so as to produce a constant periodic rate of interest on the 
remaining balance of the liability for each period. The right-of-use asset is depreciated over the shorter of the asset’s useful life and the lease term 
on a straight-line basis.

Assets and liabilities arising from a lease are initially measured on a present value basis. Lease liabilities include the net present value of the lease 
payments less any lease incentives receivable.

The lease payments are discounted using the interest rate implicit in the lease. If that rate cannot be determined, the Group’s incremental 
borrowing rate is used, being the rate that the Group would have to pay to borrow the funds necessary to obtain an asset of similar value in a 
similar economic environment with similar terms and conditions. As the Group has no borrowings it has estimated the incremental borrowing rate 
based on interest rate data available in the market, adjusted to reflect Record’s creditworthiness, the leased asset in question and the terms and 
conditions of the lease. For those leases which existed prior to the IFRS 16 transition date on 1 April 2019, a discount rate of 4% was used in 
calculating the lease liability on transition.

The leases relevant to the twelve months ended 31 March 2020, and the comparative period, are as described below.

On 7 September 2016, the Group signed a new lease on premises at Second and Third Floors, Morgan House, Madeira Walk, Windsor, at an 
annual commitment of £507,603, expiring 1 September 2022.

On 16 March 2016, the Group signed a lease on premises in New York City, at an average annual commitment of $125,840. The lease expired on 
31 May 2019.

On 1 June 2017, the Group signed a five year lease on premises in Zürich, at an annual commitment of CHF 49,680.

Record assesses whether a contract is or contains a lease at the inception of the contract.

Right-of-use (“ROU”) assets
Right-of-use assets are measured at cost comprising the following:

• 

the amount of the initial measurement of lease liability;

•  any lease payments made at or before the commencement date, less any lease incentives received;

•  any initial direct costs; and

•  an estimate of costs to be incurred to restore the assets to the condition required by the terms and conditions of the lease.

Depreciation is calculated on a straight-line basis over the lease term and included within administration costs (note 5).

110

Record plc Annual Report 2020

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Net book value of right‑of‑use assets

Year ended 31 March 2020 

Net book value on transition at 1 April 2019 

Addition 

Depreciation 

FX revaluation 

Net book value at 31 March 2020 

Lease liabilities

Current 

Non-current 

Lease payments
At 31 March 2020, the undiscounted operating lease payments on an annual basis are as follows:

Maturity of lease liability at 31 March 2020

Within 1 year  

1-2 years 

2-3 years 

After 3 years 

Total lease liability before discounting 

Group 
£’000 

1,560 

114 

(504) 

(5) 

Company 
£’000

1,435

114

(453)

—

1,175 

1,096

Group 
£’000 

Company 
£’000

544 

615 

495

584

1,159 

1,079

Group 
£’000 

Company 
£’000

568 

568 

100 

— 

508

508

94

—

1,236  

1,110

The remainder of the movement in the lease liability relates to non-cash movements. The lease term is determined as the non-cancellable period 
of a lease, together with periods covered by an option to extend the lease if the Group considers that exercise of the option is reasonably certain.

Operating leases
Total operating lease commitment under IAS 17 as at 31 March 2020 was £nil. The prior year operating lease commitments under IAS 17 primarily 
include the agreements for lease contracts for the Morgan House premises in Windsor (expiring in 2022) with an annual commitment of £507,603, 
the New York office with an annual commitment of $125,840 (expired in May 2019) and the Zürich office with an annual commitment of CHF 
49,680 (expiring in 2022).

Up until 31 March 2019, the Group considered the risks and rewards of ownership of the leased properties, and considered that they remained 
with the lessors. Consequently, all property leases were recognised as operating leases.

The Group had commitments under non-cancellable operating leases relating to land and buildings as set out below:

31 March  
2020 
£’000 

31 March 
2019 
£’000

Within 1 year  

1-5 years  

After 5 years 

Total operating lease liability 

The Group’s closing operating lease commitments can be reconciled to the opening lease liability as detailed in the table below.

Operating lease commitments as at 31 March 2019  

Adjustment for discounting at the lessee’s incremental borrowing rate at date of initial application  

Finance lease liability as at 1 April 2019 

Record plc Annual Report 2020

— 

— 

— 

— 

562

1,310

—

1,872

£’000

1,872

(199)

1,673

111

Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional information 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the financial statements continued
For the year ended 31 March 2020

13. Property, plant and equipment – Group
All property, plant and equipment assets are stated at cost less accumulated depreciation. Depreciation of property, plant and equipment is 
provided to write off the cost, less residual value, on a straight-line basis over the estimated useful life as follows:

•  Leasehold improvements – period from lease commencement to the earlier of the lease termination date and the next rent review date

•  Computer equipment – 2 to 5 years

•  Fixtures and fittings – 4 to 6 years

Residual values, remaining useful economic lives and depreciation methods are reviewed annually and adjusted if appropriate. Gains or losses on 
disposal are included in profit or loss.

The Group’s property, plant and equipment comprise leasehold improvements, computer equipment and fixtures and fittings. The carrying amount 
can be analysed as follows:

2020 

Cost 

At 1 April 2019 

Additions 

Disposals 

At 31 March 2020 

Depreciation 

At 1 April 2019 

Charge for the year 

Disposals 

At 31 March 2020 

Net book amounts 

At 31 March 2020 

At 1 April 2019 

2019 

Cost 

At 1 April 2018 

Additions 

Disposals 

At 31 March 2019 

Depreciation 

At 1 April 2018 

Charge for the year 

Disposals 

At 31 March 2019 

Net book amounts 

At 31 March 2019 

At 1 April 2018 

Leasehold 
improvements 
£’000 

Computer 
equipment 
£’000 

Fixtures 
and fittings 
£’000 

692 

— 

— 

692 

271 

126 

— 

397 

295 

421 

711 

241 

— 

952 

484 

89 

— 

573 

379 

227 

325 

2 

— 

327 

212 

38 

— 

250 

77 

113 

Leasehold 
improvements 
£’000 

Computer 
equipment 
£’000 

Fixtures 
and fittings 
£’000 

661 

31 

— 

692 

150 

121 

— 

271 

421 

511 

671 

40 

— 

711 

425 

59 

— 

484 

227 

246 

324 

1 

— 

325 

171 

41 

— 

212 

113 

153 

Total 
£’000

1,728

243

—

1,971

967

253

—

1,220

751

761

Total 
£’000

1,656

72

—

1,728

746

221

—

967

761

910

The Group’s tangible non-current assets are located predominantly in the UK.

112

Record plc Annual Report 2020

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
14. Investments

Investment in subsidiaries at cost 

Capitalised investment in respect of share based payments 

Investment in funds  

Investment in impact bonds 

Total investments 

Group 

2020 
£’000 

— 

— 

— 

2,472 

2,472 

2019 
£’000 

— 

— 

1,112 

— 

Company

2020 
£’000 

166 

1,279 

2,071 

— 

1,112 

3,516 

2019 
£’000

86

1,195

4,286

—

5,567

Company
Investments in subsidiaries
Investments in subsidiaries are shown at cost less impairment losses. The capitalised investment in respect of share-based payments offered by 
subsidiaries is equal to the cumulative fair value of the amounts payable to employees recognised as an expense by the subsidiary.

Investment in subsidiaries (at cost) 

Record Currency Management Limited 

Record Group Services Limited 

Record Portfolio Management Limited 

Record Currency Management (US) Inc. 

Record Currency Management (Switzerland) GmbH 

Trade Record Ltd 

Record Fund Management Limited 

N P Record Trustees Limited 

Total investment in subsidiaries (at cost) 

Capitalised investment in respect of share‑based payments 

Record Group Services Limited 

Record Currency Management (US) Inc. 

Record Currency Management (Switzerland) GmbH 

Total capitalised investment in respect of share‑based payments 

Total investment in subsidiaries 

Particulars of subsidiary undertakings
Name 

Nature of business

2020 
£’000 

2019 
£’000

10 

10 

10 

— 

16 

120 

— 

— 

166 

10

10

10

—

16

40

—

—

86

1,186 

1,108

89 

4 

1,279 

1,445  

85

2

1,195

1,281

Record Currency Management Limited 

Currency management services (FCA, SEC and CFTC registered)

Record Group Services Limited 

Management services to other Group undertakings

Record Currency Management (US) Inc. 

US advisory and service company (SEC and CFTC registered) 

Record Currency Management (Switzerland) GmbH 

Swiss advisory and service company

Trade Record Ltd 

Record Portfolio Management Limited 

Record Fund Management Limited 

N P Record Trustees Limited 

 Prize competition allowing subscribers to trade virtual money across  
asset classes

Dormant

Dormant

Dormant trust company

The Group’s interest in the equity capital of subsidiary undertakings is 100% of the ordinary share capital in all cases except for Trade Record Ltd 
(“Trade Record”) in which the Group’s interest is 40% of the ordinary share capital. Record Currency Management (US) Inc. is incorporated in 
Delaware (registered office: Corporation Service Company, 251 Little Falls Drive, Wilmington, DE 19808) and Record Currency Management 
(Switzerland) GmbH is incorporated in Zürich (registered office: Münsterhof 14, 8001 Zürich). Trade Record is registered in England and Wales with 
its registered office at 1 Poultry, London EC2R 8JR. Record plc and all its other subsidiaries are registered in England and Wales, each with the 
registered office at Morgan House, Madeira Walk, Windsor, Berkshire, SL4 1EP, UK.

Record plc Annual Report 2020

113

Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional information 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the financial statements continued
For the year ended 31 March 2020

14. Investments continued
Company continued
Investment in Trade Record Ltd (“Trade Record”)
Record plc owns 40% of Trade Record alongside two of its Directors each owning a further 20%. Trade Record was incorporated in February 
2019 and was considered an opportunity with the potential to create shareholder value and significant diversification from Record’s established 
currency management business.

Investment in seed funds
In addition to the subsidiaries listed above, the Company holds investments in seed funds. These funds are seed investments, which have various 
investment objectives and policies and are subject to the terms and conditions of their offering documentation. The principal activity of each is to 
invest capital from investors in a portfolio of assets in order to provide a return for those investors.

The seed fund investments are presented within investments in the Company statement of financial position, and all seed fund entities are 
sub-funds of the Record Umbrella Fund, an open-ended umbrella unit trust authorised in Ireland. Two of the four funds, Record Currency – FTSE 
Index Fund and Record Currency – Emerging Market Currency Fund, were closed in March 2020. The Company’s investment in seed funds is 
shown in the table below.

Group
Entities are consolidated on a line-by-line basis where the Group has determined that a controlling interest exists through an investment holding in 
the entity, in accordance with IFRS 10 – “Consolidated Financial Statements”. Otherwise, investments in entities are measured at fair value through 
profit or loss.

Investment in Trade Record
Record plc in conjunction with two of its Directors, controls 80% of the ordinary share capital, giving the Company rights over variable returns and 
the power to affect returns. Therefore the Company has the ability to control Trade Record, which is consequently recognised as a subsidiary.

In accordance with IFRS 10, the financial results of Trade Record are consolidated on a line-by-line basis within the financial statements of the 
Group.

Investment in seed funds
The Group has controlled the Record Currency – Strategy Development Fund and Record – Currency Multi-Strategy Fund throughout both 
the year ended 31 March 2020 and the comparative year. Both funds were consolidated in full, on a line-by-line basis in the Group’s financial 
statements throughout these periods.

The Group was in control of the Record Currency – FTSE FRB10 Index Fund throughout the comparative year ended 31 March 2019 and until 
its closure in March 2020. This fund was consolidated in full, on a line-by-line basis in the Group’s financial statements until its closure.

Investment in funds 

Record Currency – FTSE FRB10 Index Fund 

Record Currency – Emerging Market Currency Fund 

Record Currency – Strategy Development Fund  

Record – Currency Multi-Strategy Fund 

Total investment in funds  

Group 

2020 
£’000 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

2019 
£’000 

— 

1,112 

— 

— 

1,112 

Company

2020 
£’000 

— 

— 

1,181 

890 

2,071 

2019 
£’000

1,162

1,112

1,046

966

4,286

The Record Currency – Emerging Market Currency Fund was closed in March 2020. The Group did not control the Record Currency – Emerging 
Market Currency Fund at any point during the year ended 31 March 2020 or the comparative year, and therefore it did not consolidate this fund in 
the Group’s financial statements.

Investment in impact bonds
In January 2020, the Group invested £2,287,241 in impact bonds; the fair value at the year end was £2,472,241 (prior year: £nil).

114

Record plc Annual Report 2020

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
15. Deferred taxation – Group
Deferred tax is the future tax consequences of temporary differences between the carrying amounts and tax bases of assets and liabilities shown 
on the statement of financial position. The amount of deferred tax provided is based on the expected manner of recovery or settlement of the 
carrying amount of assets and liabilities, using tax rates enacted or substantively enacted at the statement of financial position date.

A deferred tax asset is recognised only to the extent that it is probable that future taxable profits will be available against which the asset can be 
utilised. The carrying amount of the deferred tax assets are reviewed at each statement of financial position date and reduced to the extent that it 
is no longer probable that sufficient taxable profit will be available to allow all or part of the asset to be recovered.

A deferred tax liability is generally recognised for all taxable temporary differences.

Deferred tax assets or liabilities arising on goodwill are not recognised but are however recognised on separately identifiable intangible assets. 
Deferred tax arising on the initial recognition of an asset or liability, other than a business combination, that at the time of the transaction affects 
neither the accounting profit or loss nor the taxable profit or loss, is not recognised.

Charge to income statement in year 

(Liability)/asset brought forward 

(Liability) carried forward  

The deferred tax (liability)/asset consists of the tax effect of temporary differences in respect of:

Deferred tax allowance on unvested share options 

Excess of taxation allowances over depreciation on fixed assets 

Total 

2020 
£’000 

(57) 

(29) 

(86) 

2020 
£’000 

1 

(87) 

(86) 

2019 
£’000

(115)

86

(29)

2019 
£’000

6

(35)

(29)

At the year end there were share options not exercised with an intrinsic value for tax purposes of £7,357 (2019: £44,534). On exercise the Group 
will be entitled to a corporation tax deduction in respect of the difference between the exercise price and the strike price. There is no unprovided 
deferred taxation.

16. Trade and other receivables
Trade and other receivables are recognised initially at fair value and subsequently measured at amortised cost using the effective interest method, 
less loss allowances. The amortised cost of trade and other receivables is stated at original invoice value, as the interest that would be recognised 
from discounting future cash receipts over the short credit period is not considered to be material.

The Group applies the IFRS 9 simplified approach to measuring expected credit losses (“ECLs”) for trade receivables at an amount equal to 
lifetime ECLs. The ECLs on trade receivables are calculated based on actual historic credit loss experience over the preceding 25 years on the 
total balance of non-credit impaired trade receivables. Accrued income relates to accrued management and performance fees earned but not 
yet invoiced.

An analysis of the Group’s receivables is provided below:

Trade receivables 

Accrued income 

Other receivables 

Prepayments 

Total 

2020 
£’000 

5,192 

2,264 

308 

940 

2019 
£’000

4,654

1,888

108

912

8,704 

7,562

All amounts are short-term. The Directors consider that the carrying amount of trade and other receivables approximates to their fair value. 
The Group has not renegotiated the terms of any receivables in the year ended 31 March 2020. The Group’s trade receivables are generally 
short-term and do not contain significant financing components. 

The Group applies the IFRS 9 simplified approach to measuring ECLs for trade receivables and contract assets at an amount equal to lifetime 
ECLs. The ECLs on trade receivables are calculated based on actual historic credit loss experience over the preceding 25 years on the total 
balance of non-credit impaired trade receivables. Contract assets relate to accrued management and performance fees earned but not yet 
invoiced and have substantially the same risk characteristics as the trade receivables. The Group has therefore concluded that the ECLs for trade 
receivables are a reasonable approximation of the loss rates for the contract assets. The Group does not expect to incur any credit losses and has 
not recognised any ECLs in the current year (2019: £nil).

Record plc Annual Report 2020

115

Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional information 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the financial statements continued
For the year ended 31 March 2020

17. Derivative financial assets and liabilities
Derivative financial instruments are initially recognised at cost on the date on which the contract is first entered into unless the fair value at 
acquisition is different to cost, in which case fair value is recognised. Subsequently they are measured at fair value with gains and losses 
recognised in profit or loss. Transaction costs are immediately recognised in profit or loss. The fair values of derivative financial instruments 
are determined by reference to active market transactions.

The Group holds derivative financial instruments for two purposes. The Group uses forward foreign exchange contracts to reduce the risk 
associated with assets denominated in foreign currencies, and additionally uses both foreign exchange options and forward foreign exchange 
contracts in order to achieve a return within the seed funds. The instruments are recognised at fair value. The fair value of the contracts is 
calculated using the market rates prevailing at the period end date. The net gain or loss on instruments is included within other income 
or expense.

Derivative financial assets 

Forward foreign exchange contracts held to hedge non-sterling based assets 

Forward foreign exchange contracts held for trading 

Foreign exchange options held for trading  

Total 

Derivative financial liabilities 

Forward foreign exchange contracts held to hedge non-sterling based assets 

Forward foreign exchange contracts held for trading 

Total 

2020 
£’000 

— 

178 

15 

193 

2020 
£’000 

(316) 

(294) 

(610) 

2019 
£’000

106

58

—

164

2019 
£’000

—

(109)

(109)

Derivative financial instruments held to hedge non-sterling based assets
At 31 March 2020 there were outstanding contracts with a principal value of £10,993,268 (31 March 2019: £5,940,246) for the sale of foreign 
currencies in the normal course of business. The fair value of the contracts is calculated using the market forward contract rates prevailing at 
31 March 2020. The Group does not apply hedge accounting.

The net gain or loss on forward foreign exchange contracts held to hedge non-sterling based assets is as follows:

Derivative financial instruments held to hedge non-sterling based assets 

Net loss on forward foreign exchange contracts at fair value through profit or loss 

2020 
£’000 

509 

2019 
£’000

242

Derivative financial instruments held for trading
The Record – Currency Multi-Strategy Fund and the Record Currency – Strategy Development Fund may use a variety of instruments including 
forward foreign exchange contracts, options and futures in order to achieve a return. The Record Currency – FTSE FRB10 Index Fund used 
forward foreign exchange contracts in order to achieve a return until its closure in March 2020.

All derivative financial instruments held by the Record – Currency Multi-Strategy Fund, the Record Currency – Strategy Development Fund 
and the Record Currency – FTSE FRB10 Index Fund were classified as held for trading throughout the period or up until the date of closure, 
where relevant.

At 31 March 2020 there were outstanding contracts with a principal value of £23,425,316 (31 March 2019: £24,323,080).

The net gain or loss on derivative financial instruments held for trading for the year was as follows:

Derivative financial instruments held for trading   

Net loss on forward foreign exchange contracts and foreign exchange options at fair value through profit or loss 

2020 
£’000 

323 

2019 
£’000

—

18. Cash management
The Group’s cash management strategy employs a variety of treasury management instruments including cash, money market deposits and 
treasury bills. Whilst the Group manages and considers all of these instruments as cash, which are subject to its own internal cash management 
process, not all of these instruments are classified as cash or cash equivalents under IFRS.

IFRS defines cash and cash equivalents as cash in hand, on demand and collateral deposits held with banks, and other short-term highly liquid 
investments that are readily convertible to a known amount of cash and are subject to an insignificant risk of changes in value. Moreover, 
instruments can only generally be classified as cash and cash equivalents where they are held for the purpose of meeting short-term cash 
commitments rather than for investment or other purposes.

116

Record plc Annual Report 2020

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
In the Group’s judgement, bank deposits and treasury bills with maturities in excess of 3 months do not meet the definition of short-term or highly 
liquid and are held for purposes other than meeting short-term commitments. In accordance with IFRS, these instruments are not categorised as 
cash or cash equivalents and are disclosed as money market instruments with maturities >3 months.

Assets managed as cash 

Bank deposits with maturities > 3 months  

Treasury bills with maturities > 3 months 

Money market instruments with maturities > 3 months 

Cash  

Bank deposits with maturities <= 3 months 

Cash and cash equivalents 

Total assets managed as cash  

Cash and cash equivalents 

Cash and cash equivalents – sterling 

Cash and cash equivalents – USD 

Cash and cash equivalents – CHF 

Cash and cash equivalents – other currencies 

Total cash and cash equivalents 

Group 

2020 
£’000 

7,958 

— 

7,958 

8,004 

6,290 

14,294 

22,252 

Group 

2020 
£’000 

2019 
£’000 

10,735 

— 

10,735 

2,150 

10,816 

12,966 

23,701 

2019 
£’000 

10,426 

10,624 

3,654 

2,180 

161 

53 

73 

89 

Company

2020 
£’000 

2019 
£’000

— 

— 

— 

2,241 

— 

2,241 

2,241 

Company

2020 
£’000 

2,241 

— 

— 

— 

—

—

—

3

—

3

3

2019 
£’000

3

—

—

—

3

14,294 

12,966 

2,241 

The Group cash and cash equivalents balance incorporates the cash and cash equivalents held by any fund deemed to be under control of 
Record plc (refer to notes 1 and 14 for explanation of accounting treatment). As at 31 March 2020, the cash and cash equivalents held by the 
seed funds over which the Group had control totalled £2,731,819 (31 March 2019: £5,107,670) and the money market instruments with 
maturities > 3 months held by these funds were £1,599,741 (31 March 2019: £675,577). As at 31 March 2020, the cash and cash equivalents 
held by Trade Record over which the Group had control was £110,130 (31 March 2019: £80,000). At 31 March 2020, Trade Record did not hold 
any money market instruments with maturities > 3 months (2019: £nil).

Details of how the Group manages credit risk are provided in note 23.

19. Current liabilities
Trade and other payables are stated at their original invoice value, as the interest that would be recognised from discounting future cash payments 
over the short payment period is not considered to be material.

Trade and other payables 

Trade payables 

Amounts owed to Group undertaking 

Other payables 

Other tax and social security 

Accruals 

Total 

Group 

2020 
£’000 

425 

— 

11 

443 

2,130 

3,009 

2019 
£’000 

294 

— 

4 

257 

2,181 

2,736 

Company

2020 
£’000 

2019 
£’000

— 

10 

— 

— 

— 

10 

—

55

—

—

—

55

The Directors consider that the carrying amount of trade and other payables approximates to their fair value.

Current tax liabilities 

Corporation tax 

Group 

Company

2020 
£’000 

601 

2019 
£’000 

692 

2020 
£’000 

2 

2019 
£’000

14

Record plc Annual Report 2020

117

Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional information 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the financial statements continued
For the year ended 31 March 2020

20. Financial liabilities
Record plc has made investments in a number of seed funds where it is in a position to be able to control those funds by virtue of the size of its 
holding. When Record plc is not the only investor in such funds and the external investment instrument does not meet the definition of an equity 
instrument under IAS 32 then the instrument is classified as a financial liability. The financial liabilities are measured at cost plus movement in value 
of the third-party investment in the fund.

Record has seeded four funds which were active during the year ended 31 March 2020. Both the Record Currency – FTSE FRB10 Index Fund 
and the Record Currency – Emerging Market Currency Fund were closed in March 2020.

The Record – Currency Multi-Strategy Fund and the Record Currency – Strategy Development Fund were considered to be under control of the 
Group as the combined holding of Record plc and its Directors constituted a majority interest throughout the current and prior years.

The mark-to-market value of units held by investors in these funds other than Record plc are shown as financial liabilities in the Group financial 
statements, in accordance with IFRS.

Mark-to-market value of external holding in seed funds consolidated into the accounts of the Record Group

Record Currency – FTSE FRB10 Index Fund 

Record – Currency Multi-Strategy Fund 

Record Currency – Strategy Development Fund 

Total financial liabilities 

2020 
£’000 

— 

2,191 

— 

2,191 

2019 
£’000

479

2,142

—

2,621

The financial liabilities relate only to the fair value of the external investors’ holding in the seed funds, and are in no sense debt.

21. Issued share capital
The share capital of Record plc consists only of fully paid ordinary shares with a par value of 0.025p each. All shares are equally eligible to receive 
dividends and the repayment of capital and represent one vote at the shareholders’ meeting.

Authorised 

Ordinary shares of 0.025p each 

Called‑up, allotted and fully paid 

Ordinary shares of 0.025p each 

2020 

2019

£’000 

Number 

£’000 

Number

100  400,000,000 

100  400,000,000

50  199,054,325 

50  199,054,325

Movement in Record plc shares held by the Record plc Employee Benefit Trust (“EBT”)
The EBT was formed to hold shares acquired under the Record plc share-based compensation plans. Under IFRS the EBT is considered to be 
under de facto control of the Group, and has therefore been consolidated into the Group financial statements.

Neither the purchase nor sale of own shares leads to a gain or loss being recognised in the Group statement of comprehensive income.

Record plc shares held by EBT as at 31 March 2018   

Adjustment for net purchases by EBT 

Record plc shares held by EBT as at 31 March 2019   

Adjustment for net purchases by EBT 

Record plc shares held by EBT as at 31 March 2020   

Number

2,393,432

592,604

2,986,036

233,351

3,219,387

The holding of the EBT comprises own shares that have not vested unconditionally to employees of the Group. Own shares are recorded at cost 
and are deducted from retained earnings.

Further information regarding the Record plc share-based compensation plans and relevant transactions made during the year is included in 
note 22.

118

Record plc Annual Report 2020

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
22. Share-based payments
During the year ended 31 March 2020 the Group has managed the following share-based compensation plans: 

a)  The Group Profit Share Scheme: share awards issued under the Group Profit Share Scheme are classified as share-based payments with 

cash alternatives under IFRS 2.

b)  The Record plc Share Scheme: share options issued under the Record plc Share Scheme are classified as equity-settled share-based 

payments under IFRS 2.

c)  The Record plc Share Incentive Plan: the Group operates the Record plc Share Incentive Plan (“SIP”) to encourage more widespread 

ownership of Record plc shares by employees. The SIP is a tax-approved scheme offering attractive tax savings for employees retaining their 
shares in the scheme over the medium to long term.

All obligations arising from the three schemes have been fulfilled through purchasing shares in the market.

a. Group Profit Share Scheme
Share‑based payments with cash alternatives
These transactions are compound financial instruments, which include a debt element and a cash element. The fair value of the debt component 
of the amounts payable to the employee is calculated as the cash amount alternative offered to the employee at grant date and the fair value of 
the equity component of the amounts payable to the employee is calculated as the market value of the share award at grant date less the cash 
forfeited in order to receive the share award. The debt component is charged to profit or loss over the period in which the award is earned and 
remeasured at fair value at each reporting date. The equity component is charged to profit or loss over the period in which the award is earned.

The Group Profit Share Scheme allocates a proportion of operating profits to a profit share pool to be distributed between all employees of the 
Group. The Remuneration Committee has the discretion to vary the proportion allocated to the profit share pool between 25% and 35% of 
operating profits. Directors and senior employees receive one third of their profit share in cash, one third in shares (“Earned Shares”) and may elect 
to receive the final third as cash only or to allocate some, or all, of the amount for the purchase of Additional Shares. The charge to profit or loss in 
respect of Earned Shares in the period was £838,483 (2019: £804,422). Other employees receive two thirds of their profit share in cash and may 
elect to receive the final third as cash only or to allocate some, or all, of the amount for the purchase of Additional Shares.

All shares which are the subject of share awards vest immediately and are transferred to a nominee, allowing the employee, as beneficial owner 
to retain full rights in respect of the shares purchased. Shares awarded under the Group Profit Share Scheme are subject to restrictions over 
subsequent sale and transfer and these restrictions are automatically lifted over one third on each anniversary of the Profit Share Payment date for 
the next three years. In the meantime, these shares cannot be sold, transferred or otherwise disposed of without the consent of the 
Remuneration Committee.

The Group Profit Share Scheme rules contain clawback provisions allowing for the repayment of profit share payments under certain 
circumstances including a material breach of contract, an error in performance of duties or a restatement of accounts which leads to a change in 
any prior award under the scheme.

b. The Record plc Share Scheme
Equity‑settled share‑based payments
The fair value of the amounts payable to employees under these awards is recognised as an expense over the vesting period of the award, 
with a corresponding increase in equity. All such awards made by the Group involve the parent company granting rights to its equity instruments 
to employees of its subsidiary. Consequently the subsidiary measures the services received from its employees in accordance with the above 
classification under IFRS 2 and recognises a corresponding increase in equity as a contribution from the parent. The parent has the obligation to 
settle the transaction with the subsidiary’s employees and therefore recognises an increase in its investment in the subsidiary and a corresponding 
increase in equity.

The fair value of options granted is measured at grant date using an appropriate valuation model, taking into account the terms and conditions 
upon which the instruments were granted including any market or performance conditions, and using quoted share prices.

The Record plc Share Scheme allows deferred share awards to be granted to employees and Directors in the Record Group. Part 1 of 
the scheme allows the grant of tax-unapproved (“Unapproved”) options to employees and Directors and Part 2 allows the grant of HMRC 
tax-approved (“Approved”) options to employees and Directors. Each participant may be granted Approved options over shares with a total 
market value of up to £30,000 on the date of grant. There is no such limit on the value of grant for Unapproved options, which have historically 
been granted with a market value exercise price in the same way as for the Approved options.

Options over an aggregate of 3,935,000 shares were granted under the Share Scheme during the year (2019: 935,000), which were all granted 
as Unapproved options (2019: 370,000 granted as Unapproved options and 565,000 as Approved options). All options were granted with an 
exercise price per share equal to the share price prevailing at the time of grant.

The 1,985,000 Unapproved options issued to employees on 21 August 2019 each become exercisable in three equal tranches on the third, 
fourth and fifth anniversary of the date of grant, subject to the employee being in employment with the Group at the relevant vesting date and 
to the extent performance conditions have been satisfied.

The 1,950,000 Unapproved options issued to employees on 18 March 2020 each become exercisable on the first, second, third and fourth 
anniversary of the date of grant, subject to the employee being in employment with the Group at the relevant vesting date and to the extent 
performance conditions have been satisfied.

Record plc Annual Report 2020

119

Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional information 
 
Notes to the financial statements continued
For the year ended 31 March 2020

22. Share-based payments continued
b. The Record plc Share Scheme continued
Equity‑settled share‑based payments continued
The fair value of the services provided by employees has been calculated indirectly by reference to the fair value of the equity instruments granted. 
Fair value amounts for the options granted in the year ended 31 March 2020, and for which a charge to profit or loss was made in the year, were 
determined using a Black-Scholes option-pricing method and the following assumptions:

Model input 

Share price  

Exercise price 

Expected volatility 

Option life 

Risk-free interest rate (%) 

Expected volatility is based on historical volatility.

Weighted average value

31.1p

31.1p

34%

4 years

0.65%

The Group share-based payment expense in respect of the Share Scheme was £83,799 for the year ended 31 March 2020 (2019: £140,236).

Outstanding share options
At 31 March 2020, the total number of ordinary shares of 0.025p outstanding under Record plc share compensation schemes was 11,895,515 
(2019: 12,291,703). These deferred share awards and options are over issued shares, a proportion of which are hedged by shares held in an EBT. 
Details of outstanding share options awarded to employees are set out below:

Granted 

Exercised 

Lapsed/   At 31 March 
2020 
forfeited 

Earliest 
vesting date 

Latest  
vesting date1 

Exercise  
price

Date of grant 

18/11/13 

26/11/14 

24/03/15 

24/03/15 

01/12/15 

27/01/16 

27/01/16 

27/01/16 

27/01/16 

30/11/16 

30/11/16 

30/11/16 

31/01/17 

26/01/18 

26/01/18 

26/01/18 

26/01/18 

29/03/19 

29/03/19 

21/08/19 

18/03/20 

At 1 April  
2019 

116,667 

720,000 

114,000 

334,750 

1,200,000 

562,500 

657,597 

218,334 

48,334 

288,574 

1,042,500 

2,200,000 

78,947 

1,461,500 

328,000 

52,000 

1,933,000 

565,000 

370,000 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

(116,667) 

— 

— 

(720,000) 

(114,000) 

(334,750) 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

£0.3000

£0.3586

£0.3450

£0.3450

— 

(600,000) 

600,000 

01/12/20 

01/12/20 

£0.2888

(456,250) 

— 

106,250 

27/01/20 

27/01/20 

£0.2450

(321,901) 

(91,632) 

244,064 

27/01/20 

27/01/20 

£0.2450

— 

— 

— 

(347,500) 

(109,167) 

109,167 

27/01/21 

27/01/21 

£0.2450

(24,167) 

24,167 

27/01/21 

27/01/21 

£0.2450

— 

— 

288,574 

30/11/20 

30/11/20 

£0.34072

695,000 

30/11/19 

30/11/20 

£0.34072

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

(733,332) 

1,466,668 

30/11/20 

30/11/21 

£0.34072

(78,947) 

— 

— 

— 

£0.3800

(151,500) 

1,310,000 

26/01/22 

26/01/22 

£0.4350

(91,375) 

236,625 

26/01/20 

26/01/22 

£0.4350

— 

— 

52,000 

26/01/21 

26/01/23 

£0.4350

1,933,000 

26/01/21 

26/01/23 

£0.4350

(40,000) 

525,000 

29/03/23 

29/03/23 

£0.2830

— 

— 

— 

370,000 

29/03/20 

29/03/23 

£0.2830

1,985,000 

21/08/22 

21/08/24 

£0.3110

1,950,000 

18/03/21 

18/03/24 

£0.28902

— 

— 

1,985,000 

1,950,000 

Total options 

  12,291,703 

3,935,000 

(1,691,068) 

(2,640,120)  11,895,515 

Weighted average  
exercise price of options 

£0.35 

£0.30 

£0.30 

£0.33 

£0.34 

1.  Under the terms of the deeds of grants, options are exercisable for twelve months following the vesting date.

During the year 1,691,068 options were exercised. The weighted average share price at date of exercise was £0.35. At 31 March 2020 a total of 
869,189 options had vested and were exercisable.

120

Record plc Annual Report 2020

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
The Directors’ interests in the combined share schemes are as follows:

Record plc Group Profit Share Scheme (interest in restricted share awards) 

Leslie Hill (appointed CEO on 13 February 2020) 

James Wood-Collins (stepped down as CEO on 13 February 2020) 

Bob Noyen 

Steve Cullen 

Record plc Share Scheme (interest in unvested share options) 

Leslie Hill (appointed CEO on 13 February 2020) 

James Wood-Collins (stepped down as CEO on 13 February 2020) 

Bob Noyen 

Steve Cullen 

Ordinary shares held as at

31 March  
2020 

31 March  

2019

613,458 

802,837

— 

318,832

311,296 

318,832

142,648 

264,286

1,405,001 

1,406,667

2,425,001 

2,426,667

1,405,001 

1,406,667

935,000 

1,131,667

Performance measures
Performance conditions attached to all options granted to Board Directors differ to those granted for all other staff. All Executive Director option 
awards are subject to a performance condition and vest on each of the third, fourth and fifth anniversaries of the date of grant subject to an 
earnings per share (“EPS”) hurdle linked to the annualised EPS growth for the respective three, four and five-year periods from grant. Vesting is on 
a stepped basis, with 25% of each tranche vesting if EPS growth over the relevant period is at least RPI plus 4% per annum, increasing through 
50%, 75% and with 100% vesting if EPS growth exceeds RPI plus 13%, as shown in the table below. Options awarded subject to EPS 
performance conditions are valued using a Black-Scholes model, adjusted for the impact of the performance conditions.

Record’s average EPS growth   

>RPI growth + 13% 

>RPI growth + 10%, =RPI growth + 7%, =RPI growth + 4%, = 3 months 

Cash and cash equivalents  

Total financial assets 

2020 
£’000 

5,192 

2,264 

308 

193 

7,958 

14,294 

30,209 

2019 
£’000

4,654

1,888

108

164

10,735

12,966

30,515

122

Record plc Annual Report 2020

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
The debtors’ age analysis is also evaluated on a regular basis for potential doubtful debts. It is management’s opinion that no provision for 
doubtful debts is required. The table below is an analysis of trade receivables and accrued income by due date: 

At 31 March 2020 

Trade receivables 

Accrued income 

Total 

At 31 March 2019 

Trade receivables 

Accrued income 

Total 

Carrying 
amount 
£’000 

5,192 

2,264 

7,456 

Carrying 
amount 
£’000 

4,654 

1,888 

6,542 

Neither  
impaired nor  
past due 
£’000 

0-3 months 
past due 
£’000 

More than 
3 months 
past due 
£’000

5,041 

2,264 

7,305 

98% 

5 

— 

5 

0% 

146

—

146

2%

Neither  
impaired nor 
past due 
£’000 

0-3 months 
past due 
£’000 

More than 
3 months 
past due 
£’000

4,369 

1,888 

6,257 

96% 

285 

— 

285 

4% 

—

—

—

0%

The Group offers standard credit terms of 30 days from invoice date. It is the Group’s policy to assess debtors for recoverability on an individual 
basis and to make a provision where it is considered necessary. In assessing recoverability, the Group takes into account any indicators of 
impairment up to the reporting date. The application of this policy generally results in debts that are past due not being provided for unless 
individual circumstances indicate that a debt is impaired.

Trade receivables are made up of 62 debtors’ balances (2019: 57). The largest individual debtor corresponds to 15% of the total balance (2019: 
19%). Debtor days, based on the generally accepted calculation of debtor days, is 74 days (2019: 68 days). This reflects the quarterly billing cycle 
used by the Group for the vast majority of its fees. As at 31 March 2020, 2% of debt was overdue (2019: 4%). No debtors’ balances have been 
renegotiated during the year or in the prior year.

Liquidity risk
The Group is exposed to liquidity risk, namely that it may be unable to meet its payment obligations as they fall due. The Group maintains 
sufficient cash and marketable securities to be able to meet all such obligations. Management review cash flow forecasts on a regular basis 
to determine whether the Group has sufficient cash reserves to meet the future working capital requirements and to take advantage of business 
opportunities. The average creditor payment period is 29 days (2019: 21 days).

The impact of covid-19 has been considered, and management believe that the Group’s ability to meet its obligations is unaffected.

Contractual maturity analysis for financial liabilities:

At 31 March 2020 

Trade payables 

Accruals 

Derivative financial liabilities  

Total 

At 31 March 2019 

Trade payables 

Accruals 

Derivative financial liabilities  

Total 

Carrying 
amount 
£’000 

425 

2,130 

610 

3,165 

Carrying 
amount 
£’000 

294 

2,181 

109 

2,584 

Due or due  Due between  Due between 
3 months 
in less than 
and 1 year 
1 month 
£’000
£’000 

1 and  
3 months 
£’000 

425 

67 

148 

640 

— 

1,793 

462 

2,255 

—

270

—

270

Due or due  Due between  Due between 
3 months 
in less than 
and 1 year 
1 month 
£’000
£’000 

1 and  
3 months 
£’000 

294 

40 

33 

367 

— 

1,041 

76 

1,117 

—

1,100

—

1,100

Record plc Annual Report 2020

123

Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional information 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the financial statements continued
For the year ended 31 March 2020

23. Financial risk management continued
Interest rate risk
Interest rate risk is the risk that the value of a financial instrument or cash flows associated with the instrument will fluctuate due to changes 
in market interest rates. Interest rate risk arises from interest-bearing financial assets and liabilities held by the Group. Interest-bearing assets 
comprise money market instruments and cash and cash equivalents which are considered to be short-term liquid assets. It is the Group’s 
policy to settle trade payables within the credit terms allowed and the Group does not therefore incur interest on overdue balances.

A sensitivity analysis has not been disclosed for the impact of interest rate changes as any reasonable range of change in interest rate would 
not directly have a material impact on profit or equity.

Interest rate profiles

At 31 March 2020 

Financial assets 

Trade receivables 

Accrued income 

Other receivables 

Derivative financial assets at fair value through profit or loss 

Money market instruments with maturities > 3 months 

Cash and cash equivalents  

Total financial assets 

Financial liabilities 

Trade payables 

Accruals 

Derivative financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss 

Financial liabilities  

Total financial liabilities 

At 31 March 2019 

Financial assets 

Trade receivables 

Accrued income 

Other receivables 

Derivative financial assets at fair value through profit or loss 

Money market instruments with maturities > 3 months 

Cash and cash equivalents  

Total financial assets 

Financial liabilities 

Trade payables 

Accruals 

Derivative financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss 

Financial liabilities  

Total financial liabilities 

Fixed rate 
£’000 

Floating rate 
£’000 

No 
interest rate 
£’000 

Total 
£’000

5,191

2,264

308

193

7,958

14,294

30,208

5,191 

2,264 

308 

193 

— 

— 

7,956 

(425) 

(425)

(2,130) 

(2,130)

(610) 

(2,191) 

(5,356) 

No 
interest rate 
£’000 

4,654 

1,888 

108 

164 

— 

— 

6,814 

(610)

(2,191)

(5,356)

Total 
£’000

4,654

1,888

108

164

10,735

12,966

30,515

(294) 

(294)

(2,181) 

(2,181)

(109) 

(2,621) 

(5,205) 

(109)

(2,621)

(5,205)

— 

— 

— 

— 

7,958 

6,271 

14,229 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

8,023 

8,023 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

Fixed rate 
£’000 

Floating rate 
£’000 

— 

— 

— 

— 

10,735 

10,816 

21,551 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

2,150 

2,150 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

Foreign currency risk
Foreign currency risk refers to the risk that the value of a financial commitment or recognised asset or liability will fluctuate due to changes in 
foreign currency rates. The Group makes use of forward foreign exchange contracts to manage the risk relating to future transactions in 
accordance with the Group’s risk management policy. 

The Group is exposed to foreign currency risk on revenue invoices and cash holdings that are denominated in a currency other than sterling, and 
also on assets and liabilities held by the Record Currency – Strategy Development Fund. The principal currencies giving rise to this risk are the US 
dollar, the Swiss franc, the euro and the Canadian dollar.

124

Record plc Annual Report 2020

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
During the year ended 31 March 2020, the Group invoiced the following amounts in currencies other than sterling:

Swiss franc (CHF) 

US dollar (USD) 

Euro (EUR)  

Australian dollar (AUD) 

Canadian dollar (CAD) 

Swedish krona (SEK) 

Singapore dollar (SGD) 

Local  
currency 
value 
‘000 

Value in 
reporting 
currency 
£’000

14,416 

11,533

9,217 

3,028 

1,520 

742 

1,476 

25 

7,274

2,644

804

436

101

14

22,806

The value of revenues for the year ended 31 March 2020 that were denominated in currencies other than sterling was £22.8 million 
(31 March 2019: £21.4 million).

Record’s policy is to reduce the risk associated with the Group’s revenues denominated in foreign currencies by using forward fixed rate currency 
sales contracts, taking into account any forecast foreign currency cash flows.

The settlement of these forward foreign exchange contracts is expected to occur within the following three months. Changes in the fair values of 
forward foreign exchange contracts are recognised directly in profit or loss.

The cash denominated in currencies other than sterling (refer to note 18), is covered by the Group’s hedging process, therefore the Directors 
consider that the foreign currency risk on cash balances is not material.

Foreign currency risk – sensitivity analysis
The Group has considered the sensitivity to exchange rate movements by considering the impact on those revenues, costs, assets and liabilities 
denominated in foreign currencies as experienced in the given period.

Sterling weakening by 10% against the dollar 

Sterling strengthening by 10% against the dollar  

Sterling weakening by 10% against the Swiss franc  

Sterling strengthening by 10% against the Swiss franc 

Impact on profit after tax 
for the year ended 31 March 

Impact on total equity 
as at 31 March

2020 
£’000 

334 

(334) 

622 

(622) 

2019 
£’000 

346 

(346) 

565 

(565) 

2020 
£’000 

334 

(334) 

622 

(622) 

2019 
£’000

346

(346)

565

(565)

Sterling/US dollar exchange rate
The impact of a change of 10% has been selected as this is considered reasonable given the current level of exchange rates and the volatility 
observed on a historical basis and market expectations for future movement. When applied to the average sterling/USD exchange rate of  
£1 = $1.27 this would result in sterling weakening to £1 = $1.15 and sterling strengthening to £1 = $1.41.

Sterling/Swiss franc exchange rate
The impact of a change of 10% has been selected as this is considered reasonable given the current level of exchange rates and the volatility 
observed on a historical basis and market expectations for future movement. When applied to the average sterling/CHF exchange rate of  
£1 = CHF 1.25 this would result in sterling weakening to £1 = CHF 1.14 and sterling strengthening to £1 = CHF 1.39.

Sensitivity analyses have not been disclosed for other currencies as any reasonable range of change in exchange rate would not have a material 
impact on profit or equity.

Record plc Annual Report 2020

125

Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional information 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the financial statements continued
For the year ended 31 March 2020

23. Financial risk management continued
Concentration risk 
The Group is exposed to concentration risk in respect of product, client type and geographical location, which could lead to over-reliance on any 
one category of revenue. Note 4 provides detail on clients contributing greater than 10% of revenue. Mitigating activities are detailed in the Risk 
management section on page 38.

Concentration risk – sensitivity analysis 
The Group has considered the impact of losing the Group’s largest client, assuming that only variable remuneration costs can be reduced in the 
short term.

Loss of largest client 

As part of the Group’s ICAAP process, several more severe scenarios are considered. 

Impact on profit after tax 
for the year ended 31 March 

Impact on total equity 
as at 31 March

2020 
£’000 

2,214 

2019 
£’000 

2,490 

2020 
£’000 

2,214 

2019 
£’000

2,490

24.  Fair value measurement
The following table presents financial assets and liabilities measured at fair value in the consolidated statement of financial position in accordance 
with the fair value hierarchy. This hierarchy groups financial assets and liabilities into three levels based on the significance of inputs used in 
measuring the fair value of the financial assets and liabilities. The fair value hierarchy has the following levels:

•  Level 1: quoted prices (unadjusted) in active markets for identical assets or liabilities;

•  Level 2: inputs other than quoted prices included within level 1 that are observable for the asset or liability, either directly (i.e. as prices) 

or indirectly (i.e. derived from prices); and

•  Level 3: inputs for the asset or liability that are not based on observable market data (unobservable inputs).

The level within which the financial asset or liability is classified is determined based on the lowest level of input to the fair value measurement. 
The financial assets and liabilities measured at fair value in the statement of financial position are grouped into the fair value hierarchy as follows:

2020 
£’000 

Level 1 
£’000 

Level 2 
£’000 

Level 3 
£’000

Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss 

Impact bonds 

2,472 

2,472 

Forward foreign exchange contracts used by seed funds  

Foreign exchange options used by seed funds 

Financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss   

Forward foreign exchange contracts used for hedging 

Forward foreign exchange contracts used by seed funds  

178 

15 

(316) 

(294) 

— 

— 

— 

— 

Total 

2,055 

2,472 

— 

178 

15 

(316) 

(294) 

(417) 

—

—

—

—

—

—

Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss 

Investments in funds 

Forward foreign exchange contracts used for hedging 

Forward foreign exchange contracts used for seed funds  

Financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss   

Forward foreign exchange contracts used for hedging 

Total 

There have been no transfers between levels in the reporting period (2019: none).

2019 
£’000 

Level 1 
£’000 

Level 2 
£’000 

Level 3 
£’000

1,112 

1,112 

106 

58 

(109) 

1,167 

— 

— 

— 

1,112 

— 

106 

58 

(109) 

55 

—

—

—

—

—

126

Record plc Annual Report 2020

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Basis for classification of financial instruments classified as level 1 within the fair value hierarchy
Impact bonds are classified as level 1. These bonds are valued using the market price and coupon rate.

Basis for classification of financial instruments classified as level 2 within the fair value hierarchy
Forward foreign exchange contracts and options are both classified as level 2. Both of these instruments are traded on an active market. Options 
are valued using an industry standard model with inputs based on observable market data whilst the fair value of forward foreign exchange 
contracts may be established using interpolation of observable market data rather than from a quoted price.

Classes and fair value of financial instruments
It is the Directors’ opinion that the carrying value of all financial instruments approximates to their fair value.

Categories of financial instrument

At 31 March 2020 

Impact bonds 

Trade and other receivables (excludes prepayments) 

Money market instruments with maturities > 3 months 

Cash and cash equivalents  

Derivative financial assets at fair value through profit or loss 

Trade payables 

Accruals 

Derivative financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss 

Total 

At 31 March 2019 

Trade and other receivables (excludes prepayments) 

Money market instruments with maturities > 3 months 

Cash and cash equivalents  

Derivative financial assets at fair value through profit or loss 

Trade payables 

Accruals 

Derivative financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss 

Note 

14 

16 

18 

18 

17 

19 

19 

17 

Note 

16 

18 

18 

17 

19 

19 

17 

Financial 
Assets at 
liabilities  
amortised  measured at 
cost  amortised cost 
£’000 

£’000 

Assets at 
fair value 
through 
profit or loss 
£’000 

Liabilities at 
fair value  
through profit  
or loss 
£’000

— 

7,764 

7,958 

14,294 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

(425) 

(2,130) 

— 

2,472 

— 

— 

— 

193 

— 

— 

— 

30,016 

(2,555) 

2,665 

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

(610)

(610)

Financial 
liabilities  
Assets at 
amortised  measured at 
cost  amortised cost 
£’000 

£’000 

Assets at 
fair value 
through 
profit or loss 
£’000 

Liabilities at 
fair value  
through profit  
or loss 
£’000

6,650 

10,735 

12,966 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

(294) 

(2,181) 

— 

— 

— 

— 

164 

— 

— 

— 

—

—

—

—

—

—

(109)

(109)

Total 

30,351 

(2,475) 

164 

Record plc Annual Report 2020

127

Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional information 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the financial statements continued
For the year ended 31 March 2020

25. Cash flow from operating activities
Group
This note should be read in conjunction with the cash flow statements. It provides a reconciliation to show how operating profit, which is based on 
accounting rules, translates to cash flows.

Operating profit 

Adjustments for non-cash movements: 

Depreciation of right-of-use assets 

Depreciation of property, plant and equipment 

Amortisation of intangible assets 

Net release of shares previously held by EBT  

Share-based payments 

Other non-cash movements 

Changes in working capital 

Increase in receivables 

Increase in payables 

(Increase)/decrease in other financial assets 

Increase in other financial liabilities 

Cash inflow from operating activities  

Interest paid 

Corporation taxes paid 

Net cash inflow from operating activities 

Company

Operating profit 

Adjustment for: 

Depreciation of right-of-use assets 

Loss/(gain) on investments  

Other 

Changes in working capital 

Increase in receivables 

Increase/(decrease) in payables 

Cash inflow/(outflow) from operating activities 

Corporation taxes paid 

Net cash inflow/(outflow) from operating activities 

2020 
£’000 

7,649 

504 

253 

129 

452 

286 

(710) 

8,563 

(1,281) 

618 

(30) 

72 

7,942 

— 

(1,399) 

6,543 

2020 
£’000 

125 

453 

25 

(162) 

(271) 

299 

469 

(17) 

452 

2019 
£’000

7,876

—

221

74

443

87

(172)

8,529

(772)

106

102

234

8,199

(22)

(1,151)

7,026

2019 
£’000

99

—

(26)

(73)

—

(1,038)

(1,038)

(5)

(1,043)

128

Record plc Annual Report 2020

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
26. Related parties transactions
Company
Details of transactions between the Company and other Group undertakings, which are related parties of the Company, are shown below:

Transactions with subsidiaries
The Company’s subsidiary undertakings are listed in note 14, which includes a description of the nature of their business.

Amounts due to subsidiaries 

Net dividends received from subsidiaries   

2020 
£’000 

132 

6,030 

2019 
£’000

(55)

6,600

Amounts owed to and by related parties will be settled in cash. No guarantees have been given or received. No provisions for doubtful debts have 
been raised against amounts outstanding (2019: £nil). No expense has been recognised during the year in respect of bad or doubtful debts due 
from related parties.

Investment in Trade Record
In March 2019, Record plc subscribed £40,000 for 40% of the ordinary share capital of Trade Record. In May 2019, Record plc invested a further 
£80,000 in Trade Record in a subsequent fundraising round.

Group
Transactions or balances between Group entities have been eliminated on consolidation and in accordance with IAS 24, are not disclosed in 
this note.

Key management personnel compensation

Short-term employee benefits 

Post-employment benefits   

Share-based payments 

Total 

Key management personnel dividends
The dividends paid to key management personnel in the year ended 31 March 2020 totalled £3,113,776 (2019: £2,981,053).

Directors’ remuneration

Emoluments (excluding pension contribution) 

Pension contribution (including payments made in lieu of pension contributions) 

Total 

2020 
£’000 

5,627 

242 

909 

2019 
£’000

5,411

204

889

6,778 

6,504

2020 
£’000 

2,328 

163 

2,491 

2019 
£’000

2,421

165

2,586

During the year, one Director of the Company (2019: one) participated in the Group Personal Pension Plan, a defined contribution scheme. 
Further detail on Directors’ remuneration is provided in the Remuneration report on pages 70 to 85, including detail on payments made to 
Directors for loss of office.

Transactions with Trade Record Ltd
In March 2019, Record plc Directors Leslie Hill and Bob Noyen each subscribed £20,000 for 20% of the ordinary share capital of Trade Record. 
In May 2019, Record plc Directors Leslie Hill and Bob Noyen each invested a further £40,000 in Trade Record in a subsequent fundraising round. 

The Directors of Trade Record are Leslie Hill, Director of Record plc, and Rebecca Venis, an existing employee of one of Record’s subsidiary 
companies and who also owns 20% of the ordinary share capital of Trade Record.

Transactions with seed funds
From time to time, the Group injects capital into funds operated by the Group to trial new products (seed capital). If the Group is able to exercise 
control over such a seed fund by holding a majority interest (whether the majority interest is held by Record plc alone, or by combining the 
interests of Record plc and its Directors), then the fund is considered to be a related party.

Record Currency – FTSE FRB10 Index Fund, Record Currency – Strategy Development Fund and Record – Currency Multi-Strategy Fund are all 
related parties on this basis.

The only transaction between the Company and these funds during the year was a redemption of £1,071,306 of the Record Currency – FTSE 
FRB10 Index Fund on its closure. 

During the year, Record plc Director Leslie Hill redeemed £100,000 from the Record – Currency Multi-Strategy Fund.

Record plc Annual Report 2020

129

Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional information 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the financial statements continued
For the year ended 31 March 2020

27. Capital management
The Group’s objectives when managing capital are (i) to safeguard the Group’s ability to continue as a going concern, (ii) to provide an adequate 
return to shareholders, and (iii) to meet regulatory capital requirements set by the UK Financial Conduct Authority.

The Group sets the amount of capital in proportion to risk. The Group manages the capital structure and makes adjustments to it in light of 
changes in economic conditions and the risk characteristics of the underlying assets. In order to maintain or adjust the capital structure, 
the Group may adjust the amount of dividends paid to shareholders, return capital to shareholders, or issue new shares. The Group had 
no debt in the current or prior financial year and consequently does not calculate a debt-to-adjusted capital ratio.

The Group’s capital is managed within the categories set out below:

Regulatory capital 

Other operating capital 

Operating capital 

Seed capital 

Total capital 

2020 
£m 

9.4 

16.5 

25.9 

2.1 

28.0 

2019 
£m

9.3

13.7

23.0

4.3

27.3

Operating capital is intended to cover the regulatory capital requirement plus capital required for day-to-day operational purposes and other 
investment purposes. The Directors consider that the other operating capital significantly exceeds the actual day to day operational requirements.

Seed capital is the capital deployed to support the growth of new funds. Seed capital is limited to 25% of the Group’s total capital.

For regulatory capital purposes, Record plc is subject to consolidated financial supervision by the Financial Conduct Authority (“FCA”). 
Our regulatory capital requirements are in accordance with FCA rules and consistent with the Capital Requirements Directive. Our financial 
resources have exceeded our financial resource requirements (regulatory capital requirements) at all times during the year. Further information 
is provided in the Financial review on page 37.

28. Ultimate controlling party
As at 31 March 2020 the Company had no ultimate controlling party, nor at 31 March 2019.

29. Post reporting date events
No adjusting or significant non-adjusting events have occurred between the reporting date and the date of authorisation.

130

Record plc Annual Report 2020

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Five year summary

Year ended 31 March 

Management fees 

Performance fees 

Other revenue 

Revenue 

Cost of sales  

Gross profit 

Operating expenses 

Other income/(expenditure) 

Operating profit 

Net interest 

Profit before taxation 

Taxation  

Profit after taxation 

Basic EPS (pence) 

Ordinary dividend (pence) 

Special dividend (pence)  

Information for shareholders

Restated 

Audited

2016 
£’000 

2017 
£’000 

2018 
£’000 

2019 
£’000 

2020 
£’000

20,941 

22,718 

23,497 

22,308 

23,133

315 

163 

— 

234 

— 

337 

2,333 

332 

1,819

611

21,419 

22,952 

23,834 

24,973 

25,563

(221) 

(298) 

(311) 

(385) 

(255)

21,198 

22,654 

23,523 

24,588 

25,308

(14,123) 

(15,067) 

(16,424) 

(16,704) 

(17,741)

(154) 

6,921 

143 

7,064 

(1,523) 

5,541 

2.55 

1.65 

— 

157 

7,744 

112 

7,856 

(1,540) 

6,316 

2.91 

2.00 

0.91 

173 

7,272 

56 

7,328 

(1,182) 

6,146 

3.03 

2.30 

0.50 

(8) 

7,876 

113 

7,989 

(1,559) 

6,430 

3.27 

2.30 

0.69 

82

7,649

88

7,737

(1,365)

6,372

3.26

2.30

0.41

Record plc
Record plc is a public limited  
company incorporated in the UK. 
Registered in England and Wales 
Company No. 1927640

Registered office
Morgan House  
Madeira Walk  
Windsor  
Berkshire  
SL4 1EP  
United Kingdom 

Tel: +44 (0)1753 852 222  
Fax: +44 (0)1753 852 224

Principal UK trading subsidiaries
Record Currency Management Limited
Registered in England and Wales  
Company No. 1710736

Record Group Services Limited
Registered in England and Wales  
Company No. 1927639

Both principal UK trading subsidiaries are 
based in Windsor.

Further information on Record plc  
can be found on the Group’s website: 
www.recordcm.com

Dates for 2020 dividend
Ex-dividend date  

Record date  

2 July 2020

3 July 2020

Annual General Meeting  

4 August 2020

Final dividend payment date   11 August 2020

Registrar
Link Asset Services  
The Registry  
34 Beckenham Road  
Beckenham  
Kent  
BR3 4TU

Further information about the  
Registrar is available on their website 
www.linkassetservices.com

Record plc Annual Report 2020

131

Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional information 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Definitions

“AIFMD” 

“Articles” 

“AUME” 

“Board” 

“bps” 

Alternative Investment Fund Managers Directive

The Articles of Association of the Company

Assets Under Management Equivalents

Company’s Board of Directors

Basis point = 100th of a per cent

“Companies Act” 

Every statute (including any orders, regulations or other subordinate legislation made under it) from time to time in 
force concerning companies in so far as it applies to the Company

“Company” 

Record plc

“$” or “dollars” 

All references to dollars or $ symbol are to the currency of the US unless stated otherwise

“EBT” 

“EM” 

“EPS” 

“ESG” 

“ETF” 

“EU” 

“FRB” 

Employee Benefit Trust

Emerging Markets

Earnings per share

Environmental, social and governance

Exchange traded fund

European Union

Forward Rate Bias

“Group” or “Record” 

The Company and/or any one of its subsidiary undertakings

“IAS” 

International Accounting Standards

“IFRS” or “IFRSs” 

International Financial Reporting Standards

“IPO” 

“KPI” 

“KRI” 

“LGPS” 

Initial Public Offering

Key Performance Indicator

Key Risk Indicator

Local Government Pension Schemes

“London Stock Exchange” 

London Stock Exchange plc

“MIFID” 

“Official List” 

“TIPS” 

“US” 

Markets in Financial Instruments Directive

The official list of the Financial Conduct Authority

US government treasury inflation protected securities

United States of America

AUME definition
The basis for measuring AUME differs for each product and is detailed below:

•  Dynamic Hedging mandates – total amount of clients’ investment portfolios denominated in liquid foreign currencies, and hence capable 

(under the terms of the relevant mandate) of being hedged;

•  Passive Hedging mandates – the aggregate nominal amount of passive hedges actually outstanding in respect of each client;

•  Currency for Return mandates – the maximum aggregate nominal amount of outstanding forward contracts for each client;

•  Multi-product mandates – the chargeable mandate size for each client;

•  Cash – the total set aside by clients and managed and/or “equitised” using futures by Record. 

132

Record plc Annual Report 2020

This report is printed on Munken Lynx Smooth, an EU Ecolabel, EMAS, ISO-14001, FSCTM (FSC-C022692) and PEFCTM 
(PEFC/05-33-99) certified paper. Arctic Paper Munkedals AB is one of the most environmentally-friendly paper mills in the world 
and meets the requirements for FSC® Chain-of-Custody (“CoC”) certification. FSC CoC certification assures that products sold 
with an FSC claim originate from well-managed forests, controlled sources, and/or reclaimed materials in their supply chain.  
It confirms that throughout the production process there is: respect for human rights, adherence to all local applicable timber 
legislation and no involvement in the destruction of high conservation areas. Arctic Paper Munkedals’ Munkedal mill is 
committed to reducing its long-term environmental impact and has the lowest water consumption per kilogram of paper in  
the entire industry, whilst the company’s energy usage is within or below the EU’s Best Available Techniques.

Designed and produced by 

Printed by CPI Colour, an FSC® and ISO 14001 accredited company.

www.lyonsbennett.com

recordcm.com

Record plc
Morgan House 
Madeira Walk 
Windsor 
Berkshire SL4 1EP 
T: +44 (0)1753 852 222

marketing@recordcm.com 
www.recordcm.com

R

e

c

o

r

d

p

l

c

A

n

n

u

a

l

R

e

p

o

r

t

2

0

2

0

 
 
 
 
 
R
e
c
o
r
d
p
l
c

A
n
n
u
a

l

R
e
p
o
r
t

2
0
2
0